Kidde Fire Systems PEGAsys Installation, Operation And Maintenance Manual

August 1999
P/N 76-100016-001
PEGAsys
®
Intelligent Suppression-Control
and Fire-Alarm System
Installation, Operation,
and Maintenance Manual
UL Listing File No. S2422
Factory Mutual Approval J.I. No. OB2A6.AY
R
LISTED
Fire Systems
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression-Control
and Fire-Alarm System
Installation, Operation,
And Maintenance Manual
Document No. PEGAsys
August 1999
This Manual Is To Be Used By Trained Distributors Only
FOREWORD
This manual is intended to clearly and accurately reflect the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System. This publication describes the operation, installation and maintenance of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System, P/Ns 76-100000-501 for
Single-Loop System and 76-100000-600 for Multi-Loop System.
TERMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
ADA
Americans with Disabilities Act
NO
Normally Open
AI
Addressable Contact Input Device
NR
Not Registered
AO
Addressable Relay Output Device
NYC
New York City
BPM
Beats Per Minute
P/N
Part Number
CCM
Central Control Module
PAS
Positive Alarm Sequence
CCP
Central Control Panel
PC
Personnel Computer
EDP
Electronic Data Processing
PCS
PEGAsys Configuration Software
EOC
Event Output Control
PC Line Power/Communication Line (RX/TX Loop)
FCP
Fire Control Panel
PS
Power Supply
GUI
Graphical User Interface
RCU
Remote Control Unit
I/O
Input/Output
RTC
Real Time Clock
ID
Identification
RX/TX
Receive Transmit
IRI
Industrial Risk Insurers
UL
Underwriter Laboratories
NC
Normally Closed
VDC
Voltage Direct Current
ACCEPTANCES, APPROVALS, AND CERTIFICATIONS
PEGAsys Single-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-501)
•
UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
•
FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
•
CSFM: Pending.
•
NYC: Pending.
PEGAsys Multi-Loop System (P/N 76-100000-600)
•
UL: Underwriter’s Laboratories Listing File Number S2422.
•
FM: Factory Mutual Engineering Corp. (Factory Mutual System) Approval J.I. Number 3005511
•
CSFM: Pending.
•
NYC: Pending.
i
(THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Forward ......................................................................................................................................................... i
Terms and Abbreviations ................................................................................................................................ i
Appendices ................................................................................................................................................... vi
List of Illustrations .......................................................................................................................................... vii
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................................. ix
Safety Summary ............................................................................................................................................ x
PARAGRAPH
TITLE
PAGE
1
1-1
1-1.1
1-1.2
1-2
1-2.1
1-2.2
1-2.3
1-2.4
1-2.5
1-2.6
1-2.7
1-2.7.1
1-2.7.2
1-2.7.3
1-2.7.4
1-2.8
1-2.9
1-2.9.1
1-2.9.2
1-2.9.3
1-2.10
1-2.11
1-2.12
1-2.13
1-2.14
1-3
GENERAL INFORMATION ................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
System Description ........................................................................................................................................................ 1-1
System Components ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Component Description ................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
Central Control Module (CCM) ....................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Display Module ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-1
Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................................................................................................ 1-2
Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Basic Motherboard ......................................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Multi-Loop Motherboard ................................................................................................................................................. 1-3
Input/Output Modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Signal Output Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Agent Release Output Module ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
City Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Standby Batteries ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-4
Intelligent Loop Devices ................................................................................................................................................. 1-4
SmartOneTM Ionization Detectors ................................................................................................................................... 1-4
SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ................................................................................................................................ 1-5
SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................................................................................. 1-5
SmartOne Detector Bases ............................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Addressable Contact Input Devices .............................................................................................................................. 1-5
Addressable Relay Output Devices ............................................................................................................................... 1-5
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing .................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Loop Isolator Devices .................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
System Specification ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
2
2-1
2-1.1
2-2
2-2.1
2-2.2
2-2.3
2-3
2-3.1
2-3.2
2-3.3
2-4
2-5
2-5.1
2-5.2
2-5.3
2-5.4
2-5.4.1
2-5.4.2
2-5.4.3
2-5.4.4
2-6
2-6.1
2-6.2
2-6.2.1
2-6.2.2
OPERATION .................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Mode of Operation .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Control and Indicators .................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
LCD Display ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
Audible Device ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Control and Indicator Description .................................................................................................................................. 2-2
System Security .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-2
Levels of Security ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-2
Default Passwords ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
Entering Passwords ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
System Power-Up .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-2
System Menus ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Menu Structure ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Accessing the System Menus ........................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Exiting the System Menus .............................................................................................................................................. 2-4
Menu Functions .............................................................................................................................................................. 2-4
Isolate Menu Function .................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
List Menu Function ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Set Menu Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
Test Menu Function ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-4
Modes of Operation ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-5
Normal Standby Mode .................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Active Alarm Mode ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-5
Alarm Mode Indications .................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
Alarm Mode User Action ................................................................................................................................................. 2-5
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
PARAGRAPH
TITLE
PAGE
2-6.3
2-6.3.1
2-6.3.2
2-6.4
2-6.4.1
2-6.4.2
2-7
2-8
2-8.1
2-8.1.1
2-8.2
2-8.2.1
2-8.2.2
2-8.3
2-8.3.1
2-8.3.2
2-8.3.3
2-8.3.4
2-8.3.5
2-8.4
2-8.5
2-8.5.1
2-8.6
2-8.7
2-8.7.1
2-8.7.2
2-8.7.3
2-8.7.4
2-8.7.5
Active Supervisory Trouble Mode ................................................................................................................................. 2-10
Supervisory Trouble Mode Indication ........................................................................................................................... 2-10
Supervisory Trouble Mode User Action ........................................................................................................................ 2-10
Active Trouble Mode ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
Trouble Mode Indications .............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Trouble Mode User Action ............................................................................................................................................. 2-11
Printing Operation ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
System Programming ................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
EOC Programming ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-11
Listing EOC Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 2-12
RTC Programming ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Listing RTC Programming ........................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ............................................................................................................ 2-12
Types of Inputs and Outputs ........................................................................................................................................ 2-12
System Inputs ............................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
Remote Control Unit (RCU) ......................................................................................................................................... 2-12
RX/TX Loops ................................................................................................................................................................. 2-12
System Outputs ............................................................................................................................................................ 2-13
System I/O Modules ..................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Addressing I/O Modules ............................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Registering I/O Module Assignments .......................................................................................................................... 2-13
Listing I/O Module Assignment .................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Addressing RCU’s ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-13
Registering RCU’s ....................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
Detector Registration ................................................................................................................................................... 2-14
Addressable Contact Monitor Registration .................................................................................................................. 2-14
Remote Relay Registration .......................................................................................................................................... 2-15
Listing all Registered RCU’s ....................................................................................................................................... 2-15
Un-registering RCU’s .................................................................................................................................................. 2-15
3
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-3.1
3-3.2
3-3.3
3-3.4
3-3.5
3-3.6
3-3.7
3-3.8
3-3.9
3-3.10
3-3.11
3-3.12
3-3.13
3-3.14
3-3.15
3-3.16
3-3.17
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION .......................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1
Overall Block Diagram Description ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
Functional Descriptions ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Central Control Module .................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) Module ............................................................................................................................ 3-3
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C ............................................................................................................... 3-5
Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard ............................................................................................................................................ 3-6
Signal Output Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Agent Release Module ................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
City Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-10
Field Devices ................................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
SmartOne Ionization Detectors .................................................................................................................................... 3-11
SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors ............................................................................................................................... 3-11
SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................................................................................ 3-11
Addressable Contact Input Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-11
Addressable Relay Output Devices ............................................................................................................................. 3-12
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ................................................................................................................................ 3-12
Loop Isolator Devices .................................................................................................................................................. 3-12
4
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-3.1
4-3.2
4-3.3
4-3.4
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE ......................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Maintenance Procedures ............................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Lamp Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Loop Device Test ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-1
Battery Test ..................................................................................................................................................................... 4-1
Walk Test ........................................................................................................................................................................ 4-2
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
PARAGRAPH
TITLE
PAGE
4-3.4.1
4-3.4.2
4-3.5
4-3.5.1
4-4
4-4.1
4-4.2
4-5
4-5.1
4-6
4-6.1
Walk Testing Detectors .................................................................................................................................................. 4-2
Walk Test Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
Alarm Simulation Test (AST) .......................................................................................................................................... 4-2
AST Procedure ............................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits .................................................................................................................. 4-3
Disarming Release Circuits .......................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Arming Release Circuits ................................................................................................................................................ 4-3
Power-Down System ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-3
Power-Down Procedure ................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
Power-Up System .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
Power-Up Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 4-4
5
5-1
5-2
5-2.1
5-2.2
5-3
5-4
5-4.1
5-4.2
5-4.3
5-4.4
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................. 5-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
Standard Fault Isolation Techniques ............................................................................................................................. 5-1
Visual Inspection ............................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Power Checks ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-1
Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................................. 5-1
Removal and Replacement ........................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Required Tools ............................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Central Control Module .................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
RX/TX Module ................................................................................................................................................................. 5-2
Field Devices .................................................................................................................................................................. 5-3
6
6-1
PARTS LIST .................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 6-1
7
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-7.1
7-7.2
7-7.3
7-7.4
7-7.6
7-7.7
7-7.8.
7-8
7-9
7-9.1
7-9.2
7-10
7-10.1
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-14.1
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-18.1
7-18.2
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................................................ 7-1
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Materials Required For Installation ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
Installation Procedure For Central Control Panel ......................................................................................................... 7-1
Installation Procedure For Expansion Enclosures ........................................................................................................ 7-1
Installation Procedure For I/O Motherboard ................................................................................................................... 7-2
Installation Procedure For Rx/Tx Module (Multi-Loop Only) ........................................................................................... 7-2
Installation of I/O Modules .............................................................................................................................................. 7-3
Signal Audible Output Module ........................................................................................................................................ 7-3
Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Agent Release Module ................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
City-Tie Output Module ................................................................................................................................................... 7-4
Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 7-4
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure .............................................................................................. 7-4
Power Supply Communication Connections ................................................................................................................ 7-6
Connecting AC Power .................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Install And Connect DC Power ....................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Battery Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Batteries ......................................................................................................................................................................... 7-6
Field Device Connection To RX/TX Module .................................................................................................................... 7-7
Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ............................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Output Signal Connection .............................................................................................................................................. 7-9
External Power Failure Indicator Connection .............................................................................................................. 7-10
Detector Installation ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-10
Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivities ........................................................................................ 7-10
Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ..................................................................... 7-10
Addressable Contact Input Device Installation ............................................................................................................. 7-11
Addressable Relay Output Device Installation ............................................................................................................. 7-11
Installation Checkout ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
Connection of Peripherals ............................................................................................................................................ 7-11
Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer ............................................................................................................ 7-11
Connecting a Printer ..................................................................................................................................................... 7-11
v
APPENDICES
APPENDIX
TITLE
PAGE
A
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................................. A-1
B
SYSTEM EXPANSION .................................................................................................................................................... B-1
C
RELEASING APPLICATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... C-1
D
NOT USED .................................................................................................................................................................... D-1
E
FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................... E-1
F
GLOSSARY ..................................................................................................................................................................... F-1
G
DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ G-1
H
INDEX ............................................................................................................................................................................ H-1
I
SYSTEM DRAWINGS ...................................................................................................................................................... I-1
J
PEGAsys NETWORK INTERFACE CARD ...................................................................................................................... J-1
K
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER ............................................................................................................................ K-1
L
REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE ............................................................... L-1
M
ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE MODULE ........................................................................................................................ M-1
N
NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM) ......................................................................................... N-1
O
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. O-1
vi
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
FIGURE
TITLE
PAGE
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14
1-15
1-16
1-17
1-18
1-19
1-20
1-21
PEGAsys System Overall Diagram ................................................................................................................................ 1-0
Central Control Module (CCM) ....................................................................................................................................... 1-2
Display Module Assembly .............................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX) ............................................................................................................................ 1-2
Power Supply/Charger Assembly .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
Basic I/O Motherboard .................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard ............................................................................................................................................ 1-3
Signal Output Module ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
Relay Output Module ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Agent Release Output Module ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
City-Tie Module ............................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
Battery Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-4
SmartOneTM Detection Device ....................................................................................................................................... 1-4
4-inch Detector Base ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
6-inch Detector Base ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-5
Addressable Contact Input Device ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Addressable Relay Output Device ................................................................................................................................. 1-5
Air Duct Housing ............................................................................................................................................................ 1-5
Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ............................................................................................................................................. 1-6
Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount ............................................................................................................................................ 1-6
Loop Isolator, 6” Detector Base Mount ........................................................................................................................... 1-6
2-1
2-2
2-3
System Front Panel ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-1
Level One Menu Structure .............................................................................................................................................. 2-6
Level Two Menu Structure ............................................................................................................................................... 2-7
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
3-6
3-7
3-8
3-9
3-10
3-11
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-16
3-17
3-18
Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System ................................................................................................................ 3-1
Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System ................................................................................................................... 3-1
Central Control Module, Details ..................................................................................................................................... 3-2
Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details ........................................................................................................................... 3-3
Obsolete Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A, Details .................................................................................. 3-4
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C, Details ................................................................................................. 3-5
Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard, Details .............................................................................................................................. 3-6
Signal Output Module, Details ....................................................................................................................................... 3-7
Relay Output Module, Details ......................................................................................................................................... 3-8
Agent Release Output Module, Details .......................................................................................................................... 3-9
City Tie Module, Details ................................................................................................................................................ 3-10
Typical Detector ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-11
Addressable Contact Input Device ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
Addressable Relay Output Device ............................................................................................................................... 3-12
DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ........................................................................................................................................... 3-12
Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount .......................................................................................................................................... 3-13
Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone ........................................................................................................................................... 3-13
Loop Isolator, 6” Detector Base Mount ......................................................................................................................... 3-13
5-1
5-2
Installation for Single Loop ............................................................................................................................................ 5-2
Installation for Multi-Loop ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2
7-1
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
CCP Installation Drawing ............................................................................................................................................... 7-1
Back Plate, I/O Motherboard & 4 P.S. .............................................................................................................................. 7-2
Back Plate, 8 P.S. ............................................................................................................................................................ 7-2
Back Plate, 2 I/O Motherboard ........................................................................................................................................ 7-2
Installation for Multi-Loop ............................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram ........................................................................................................... 7-4
Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram .......................................................................................................... 7-5
Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure .................................................................. 7-5
Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure ................................................................. 7-5
Battery Enclosure ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Conduit to CCP ............................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Shielded Wire to CCP .................................................................................................................................................... 7-7
Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections .............................................................................................................................. 7-8
vii
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (CONT.)
FIGURE
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
TITLE
PAGE
Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections .............................................................................................................................. 7-8
Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop Isolators .............................................................................................. 7-9
Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection ................................................................................................................................ 7-9
CCM Printer Port ........................................................................................................................................................... 7-12
viii
LIST OF TABLES
TABLES
TITLE
PAGE
1-1
System Specification ...................................................................................................................................................... 1-6
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Controls and Indicators .................................................................................................................................................. 2-3
Isolate Menu Function .................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
List Menu Function ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-8
Set Menu Function .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-9
Test Menu Function ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
3-1
3-2
Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard Connectors ........................................................................................................................ 3-6
Approved Release Output Devices ................................................................................................................................ 3-9
5-1
5-2
Troubleshooting Index ................................................................................................................................................... 5-1
RX/TX Configuration Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 5-3
6-1
PEGAsys System Parts List ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
7-1
7-2
7-3
RX/TX Configuration Selection ....................................................................................................................................... 7-3
Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev. A ......................................................................................................... 7-5
Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev. C ........................................................................................................ 7-5
ix
SAFETY SUMMARY
Installation Precautions Adherence to the following will aid in problem-free installation with long-term reliability:
Warning - Several different sources of power can be connected to this fire alarm control panel. Disconnect all sources of power
before servicing. Control unit and associated equipment may be damaged by removing and/or inserting cards, modules, or interconnecting cables while the unit is energized. Do not attempt to install, service, or operate this unit until this manual is read and understood.
CAUTION - System Reacceptance Test after Software Changes: To ensure proper system operation, this product must be tested in
accordance with NFPA - 1996 Chapter 7 after any programming operation or change in site-specific software. Reacceptance testing is
required after any change, addition or deletion of system components, or after any modification, repair or adjustment to system hardware
or wiring.
All components, circuits, system operations, or software functions known to be affected by a change must be 100% tested. In addition,
to ensure that other operations are not inadvertently affected, at least 10% of initiating devices that are not directly affected by the change,
up to a maximum of 50 devices, must also be tested and proper system operation verified.
This system meets NFPA requirements for operation at 0 to 49° C and at a relative humidity of 85% RH (non-condensing) @ 30°C.
However, the useful life of the system’s standby batteries and the electronic components may be adversely affected by extreme temperature ranges and humidity. Therefore, it is recommended that this system and its peripherals be installed in an environment with a nominal
room temperature of 60-80°F.
Like all solid state electronic devices, this system may operate erratically or can be damaged when subjected to lightning induced
transients. Although no system is completely immune from lightning transients and interference, proper grounding will reduce susceptibility. The use of overhead or outside aerial wiring is not recommended due to the increased susceptibility to nearby lightning
strikes. Consult with the Applications Engineering Department if any problems are anticipated or encountered.
Disconnect AC power and batteries prior to removing or inserting circuit boards. Failure to do so can damage circuits.
Remove all electronic assemblies prior to any drilling, filing, reaming, or punching of the enclosure. When possible, make all cable
entries from the sides. Before making modifications, verify that they will not interfere with battery and printed circuit board location.
Do not over tighten screw terminals, over tightening may damage threads, resulting in reduced terminal contact pressure and difficult
with screw terminal removal.
This system contains static-sensitive components. Always ground yourself with a proper wrist strap before handling any circuits so that
static charges are removed from the body. Use static suppressive packaging to protect electronic assemblies removed from the unit.
Follow the Instructions in the installation, operating, and programming manuals. These instructions must be followed to avoid damage to
the control panel and associated equipment. PEGAsys operation and reliability depend upon proper installation.
Fire Alarm System Limitations
While installing a fire alarm system may make lower insurance
rates possible, it is not a substitute for fire insurance!
An automatic fire alarm system - typically made up of smoke detectors, heat detectors, manual pull stations, audible warning devices,
and a fire alarm control with remote notification-capability can provide early warning of a developing fire. Such a system, however, does
not assure protection against property damage or loss of life resulting from a fire.
Any fire alarm system may fail for a variety of reasons:
Smoke detectors may not sense fire where smoke cannot reach the detectors such as in chimneys, in walls, or roofs, or on the other side
of closed doors. Smoke detectors also may not sense a fire on another level or floor of a building. A second floor detector, for example,
may not sense a first floor or basement fire. Furthermore, all types of smoke detectors - both ionization and photoelectric types, have
sensing limitations. No type of smoke detector can sense every kind of fire caused by carelessness and safety hazards like smoking in
bed, violent explosions, escaping gas, improper storage of flammable materials, overloaded electrical circuits, children playing with
matches, or arson.
Audible warning devices such as bells may not alert people if these devices are located on the other side of closed or partly open doors
or are located on another floor of a building.
A fire alarm system will not operate without electrical power. If AC power fails, the system will operate from standby batteries only for a
specified time.
Rate-of-Rise heat detectors may be subject to reduced sensitivity over time. For this reason, the rate-of-rise feature of each detector
should be tested at least once per year by a qualified fire protection specialist.
x
Auxiliary Equipment used in the system may not be technically compatible with the control panel. It is essential to use only equipment
listed for service with your control panel.
Telephone lines needed to transmit alarm signals from a premise to a central monitoring station may be out of service or temporarily
disabled.
The most common cause of fire alarm malfunctions, however, is inadequate maintenance. All devices and system wiring should be
tested and maintained by professional fire alarm installers following written procedures supplied with each device. System inspection
and testing should be scheduled monthly or as required by National and/or local fire codes. Adequate written records of all inspections
should be kept.
GENERAL SAFETY NOTICES The following must be observed to maintain personnel safety.
The following general safety notices supplement specific warnings and cautions appearing in the manual. The safety precautions in this
section must be understood and applied during operation and maintenance. This manual is to be used by trained distributors/technicians.
The entire manual should be read and fully understood prior to installation.
TEST EQUIPMENT
Make certain test equipment is in good operating condition. Do not touch live equipment or personnel working on live equipment while
holding a test meter. Some types of measuring devices should not be grounded; these devices should not be held when taking measurements.
FIRST AID
Any injury, no matter how slight, should never go unattended. Always obtain first aid or medical attention immediately.
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following general safety precautions are to be observed at all times:
1.
All electrical components associated with equipment shall be installed and grounded in accordance with NEC, NFPA and local
regulation requirements.
2.
Special precautionary measures are essential to prevent applying power to equipment at any time maintenance work is in progress.
3.
Before working on electrical equipment, use a voltmeter to ensure that system is not energized.
4.
When working near electricity, do not use metal rules, flashlights, metallic pencils, or any other objects having exposed conductive
material.
5.
When connecting a meter to terminals for measurement, use range higher than expected voltage.
xi
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
1-1
In multi-loop form the PEGAsys ML panel (P/N 76-100000-600)
consists of a CCM, one power-supply assembly, one RX/TX module and one multi-loop motherboard mounted in the enclosure.
The unique multi-loop motherboard provides the ability to connect
up to eight RX/TX modules to the system allowing a full 2040 addressable points to be connected to the PEGAsys ML system.
INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the operation, maintenance, troubleshooting, parts listing, and installation information necessary to support the PEGAsys Intelligent Suppression Control and Fire Alarm
System.
Auxiliary enclosures are available to allow the system to be expanded. The auxiliary enclosure has the same dimensions as that
of the main enclosure with the absence of the window in the door.
There are optional back planes which install in the expansion enclosure. This allows the number of I/O modules and system power
supplies to be expanded. To allow for maximum system flexibility
expansion enclosure(s) and backplane(s) can be added to the
system. Refer to Appendix B for further system expansion details.
NOTE: This manual is to be used by trained distributors only.
The entire manual should be read and fully understood
prior to installation.
1-1.1
System Description
PEGAsys is a fire alarm/suppression control system which can
be used for local, auxiliary, remote protective signaling and releasing device service. The system is a microprocessor based
design for use with intelligent detectors and loop devices.
The system utilizes distributed intelligent field devices. These
devices are typically smoke detectors, contact input devices
relay outputs and signal output modules which represent a single
fire alarm initiation/indicating zone. Each device contains its own
data transceiver, micro controller, 4k of memory and applicable
algorithms which allows each device to operate independent of
the control system. These unique devices have the ability to
analyze information, make decisions and store information within
themselves. They communicate with the PEGAsys system using the BIP protocol which utilizes a two-wire (Style 4), four wire
(Style 6) or isolated (Style 7) multiplex trunk. The PEGAsys can
support up to 255 device addresses per loop with a maximum
of 8 loops for a total of 2040 Intelligent device points per system.
1-2
The following paragraphs give a brief description of each components used in the PEGAsys system. For functional descriptions of each component see Chapter 3 of this manual.
1-2.1
Central Control Module (CCM)
The CCM assembly is the heart of the system and is comprised
of two PCB assemblies, the display module and the main processor module. The CCM controls the operation and supervision of all the system modules and software within the PEGAsys
system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX module,
processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and
transmits output commands to the output modules, field devices,
and display module(s).
The PEGAsys is capable of controlling a wide variety of auxiliary devices, such as relays, audible visual indicating signal
devices and agent/sprinkler release systems. The system also
supports the use of serial printers which provide hard copy of
system status information.
1-1.2
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
1-2.2
Display Module
The display module assembly, attached to the main processor
PCB, provides the system with the operator interface for control
switches, system status LED’s, system trouble/alarm buzzer, a
80-character (2 x 40) LCD display and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and
navigating through the user menus. The system buzzer provides two distinctly different signaling patterns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.
System Components
The system is comprised of three major components as shown
in Figure 1-1: the Central Control Panel (CCP) communicates
with the field devices and drives output devices such as alarm
signals that communicate with central stations and various types
of control equipment. A display panel located on the CCP provides system status LED’s, Control Switches and a 80-character LCD for alphanumeric display of system status information.
The single-loop PEGAsys Central Control Panel (P/N 76100000-501) consists of the Central Control Module (CCM) assembly, one receiver/transmitter (RX/TX) module and one power
supply assembly. Optionally the system can add a motherboard
assembly which allow the installation of optional output modules. An auxiliary power supply module can be added which
increases the base system power supply capacity to 8.0 amps
at 24 VDC.
76-100016-001
1-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
•
Battery charging and supervision
•
AC power supervision
•
24 VDC supervision
•
Battery load test
•
24 VDC ground fault detection (+/-)
•
Auxiliary 24 VDC outputs
Loop Isolator
for Style 7
Display Reset Switch
Figure 1-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
Figure 1-2. Central Control Module (CCM)
System Status
POWER ON
ALARM
TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
GROUND FAULT
PREALARM
CPU ERROR
SILENCE
ACKLDGE
SILENCE
SCROLL
DRILL
RESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Figure 1-3. Display Module Assembly
1-2.3
Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX functions as the hardware & software interface between the field devices and the CCM. The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and establishes communications
with the field devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from
the field devices and reports these changes to the CCM. The
RX/TX shown in Figure 1-4 is capable of communicating with
up to 255 intelligent devices and complies with the wiring requirements of NFPA Style 4, 6 & 7 (with the use of the loop
isolator device). Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit “T”
tapping, or branch circuitry.
1-2.4
Figure 1-5. Power Supply/Charger Assembly
1-2.5
Power Supply/Charger Assembly
The basic I/O motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100007-001) is
an assembly which can accept up to 8 I/O module circuit board
assemblies. The motherboard is mounted to the back of the
system enclosure and /or the auxiliary enclosures. It distributes
the system 24 VDC power and I/O bus communications to the I/
O modules. The I/O bus communications are provided by a RJ12 (flat phone cable) style connection. The 24 VDC is provided
by the system power supply via a 2-conductor wiring harness.
The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) is
comprised of a printed circuit board (PCB) assembly and a AC/
DC switching power supply unit. The switching power supply
unit provides 4 amps of 24 VDC from the 120/240 VAC input
power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which
provides the system with:
August 1999
Basic Motherboard
1-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
1-2.7.1 SIGNAL OUTPUT MODULE
The I/O motherboard mounts to standoffs on the back of the main
and expansion enclosures with screws provided.
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of (8) Alarm
Sounder/Signal Output cards, thus providing 32 possible signal circuits. Each Alarm Sounder/Signal Output card, Figure 18, is equipped with supervised 24 VDC outputs which can
operate as Style “Y” or Style “Z” indicating circuits.
Figure 1-6. Basic I/O Motherboard
1-2.6
Multi-Loop Motherboard
76-100003-001
The multi-loop I/O motherboard assembly (P/N 76-100017-001)
is an assembly which can accept up to 8 RX/TX modules and
provide connections for up to 7 I/O module circuit board assemblies. The ML motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the
back of the main system enclosure. It distributes system 24
VDC power, CCM-RX/TX communications for up to 8 RX/TX
modules and I/O bus communications to the I/O modules. The
I/O bus communications are provided by a RJ-12 (flat phone
cable) style connection. A single RJ-12 connection connects
the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/TX communications.
The 24 VDC is provided by the system power supply via a 2conductor wiring harness.
Figure 1-8. Signal Output Module
1-2.7.2 RELAY OUTPUT MODULE
Figure 1-7. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard
1-2.7
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Auxiliary Relay Output cards, allowing up to 32 relays. Each Auxiliary Relay Output card is equipped with four (4), Form C,
dry-contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay
output is provided through the system operator menu.
Input/Output Modules
The optional input/output modules allow the PEGAsys system
to interface with external auxiliary devices. These auxiliary devices can be audible/visual signal devices, HVAC systems, elevator recall, power shut down, remote annunciators, agent/
sprinkler release system and any other control type input or
output which may need to be interfaced to the system.
The input and output modules plug into the motherboard assembly located on the back plate of the system enclosure. Each
I/O module occupies one slot in the motherboard assembly which
has 8 slots available. The I/O modules and the CCM communicate over the RS-485 based I/O bus, which uses a 6-conductor
phone type cable to connect the CCM to the motherboard.
The PEGAsys single-loop panel has the ability to support a
maximum of 16 I/O modules, in any combination. However, no
more than 8 of any one type of module can be used. If using a
City-Tie module, the limit is one per system.
The PEGAsys multi-Loop panel has the ability to support a maximum of 23 I/O modules, in any combination, on the system.
However, no more than 8 of any one type module can be used.
If using a City-Tie module, the limit is one per system.
The following paragraphs describe each available I/O module
in greater detail.
76-100016-001
1-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
76-100002-001
Figure 1-11. City Tie Module
1-2.8
Standby Batteries
Space is provided within the central control panel enclosure for
up to two (2) 12-V, 17 Amp Hour, sealed lead-acid batteries
used for 24, 60 or 90 hour standby operation. If additional batteries are required, an optional battery enclosure is available.
The enclosure (Figure 1-12) is a heavy duty steel cabinet which
can house up to two 40AH batteries. For installation information see Paragraph 7-9.1.
Figure 1-9. Relay Output Module
1-2.7.3 AGENT RELEASE OUTPUT MODULE
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 agent
release output modules, providing up to 8 release circuits and
24 maximum signal outputs on those modules.
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
STANDBY BATTERIES
KIDDE
Figure 1-12. Battery Enclosure
1-2.9
Intelligent Loop Devices
The SmartOneTM Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm devices provide the PEGAsys control system with smoke and heat detection and necessary monitoring and control functions required
by today’s advanced fire alarm systems. The following paragraphs describe each available intelligent detection device.
Figure 1-10. Agent Release Output Module
1-2.7.4 CITY-TIE MODULE
The City-Tie (Notification) Module will provide connection and
operation for local energy, shunt type master box and reverse
polarity styles of output.
Figure 1-13. SmartOne Detection Device
1-2.9.1 SmartOne IONIZATION DETECTORS
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detectors provide true distributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smoke
detection to the PEGAsys system.
August 1999
1-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
1-2.9.2 SmartOne PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true distributed-intelligence, addressable microprocessor-based smoke
detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-2.9.3 SmartOne HEAT DETECTORS
The SmartOne Thermistor heat detectors provide true distributed-intelligence, addressable, microprocessor-based heat detection to the PEGAsys system.
1-2.10 SmartOne Detector Bases
Figure 1-16. Addressable Contact Input Device
The SmartOne series of detection devices all use universal
mounting bases which are available in three styles. The 4SB is
a European-Style 4-inch base whose outside diameter matches
that of the low profile SmartOne detectors, which when combined, provides a very attractive unit. The 4SB, shown in Figure
1-14, mounts to standard 3, 3.5-inch, or 100-mm electrical boxes
with ease.
1-2.12 Addressable Relay Output Devices
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) provides the PEGAsys system with a Form-C dry-contact interface
for remote control applications.
Figure 1-14. Four-inch Detector Base
The 6SB model, shown above, is a traditional style detector
base with an integral trim ring which provides coverage for any
inconsistencies between the electrical box and ceiling material.
The 6SB mounts to standard 3, 3.5 and 4 inch electrical boxes
with ease.
Figure 1-17. Addressable Relay Output Device
1-2.13 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting particles of combustion products in air-handling systems.
Figure 1-15. 6-inch Detector Base
1-2.11 Addressable Contact Input Devices
The SmartOne Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows
an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm devices, such as water flow and tamper switches to the PEGAsys
system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to the
manual alarm, manual release and abort stations.
Figure 1-18. Air Duct Housing
76-100016-001
1-5
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 1-1. System Specifications
1-2.14 Loop Isolator Devices
The SmartOne series of loop devices, shown in Figures 1-19
through 1-21, offer optional loop isolation which protects the
loop from wire to wire short conditions (NFPA Style 7.0).
IT E M
C H AR AC T E R IS T IC S
P o w er S u p p ly
*P o we r Re q ui re me nt:
120/220 V, 50/60 Hz
P.S . Inp ut (P e r Mo d ule )
120 VA C , 1.9 A mp s
220 VA C , .95 A mp s
P.S . Outp ut (P e r Mo d ule )
24 V D C , 4 A mp s
B a t. C ha rg e r Outp ut:
26.4 V D C , 3A mp s
A ux. Outp uts: (2)
24 V D C , 1.5 A mp s e a ch
CCM
Figure 1-19. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone
S i g na l Outp ut:
24 V D C , 2 A mp s
Re le a se Outp ut:
24 V D C , 2 A mp s
Re la y C o nta ct Ra ti ng :
1 A mp @ 30 V D C
Tro ub le Re la y Ra ti ng :
1 A mp @ 30 V D C
SHORT-1
SHORT-2
R X T X M o d u le
J1
Underwriters
Laboratories Inc.
R
DS1
R
LISTED
REFER TO
INSTALLATION MANUAL
P/N 76-100016-001
FOR MODULE INSTALL.
PROCEDURES
LOOP ISOLATOR
RX/TX
DS2
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
Ma x. Vo lta g e :
26.4 V D C
Mi n. Vo lta g e :
19.0 V D C
Ma x. Li ne C a p a ci ta nce :
1.0 uF
Ma x. Li ne Re si sta nce :
26 Ohms
Ma x. A d d re ssa b le
D e vi ce s:
255 p e r RX TX
R elease M o d u le
Figure 1-20. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount
Re le a se Outp ut
2 A mp s @ 24 V D C
S i g na l Outp ut
2 A mp s @ 24 V D C e a ch
Re le a se Outp ut Typ e :
C a p a b le o f re le a si ng
so le no i d s (sup p re ssi o n
a nd sp ri nkle r)
S ig n al Au d ib le M o d u le
S i g na l Outp uts:
(4) style " Y" o r (2) style
" Z" 2 A mp s @ 24 V D C
e a ch
R elay M o d u le
Figure 1-21. Loop Isolator, 6" Detector Base Mount
C o nta ct Ra ti ng :
(4) Fo rm C C o nta cts,
2 A mp s @ 30 V D C o r
1 A mp @ 120 VA C
C ity T ie M o d u le
1-3
SYSTEM SPECIFICATION
S hunt C o nta ct:
5 A mp s @ 24 V D C ,
Re si sti ve
Lo ca l E ne rg y Outp ut:
500 mA ma x. @ 24 V D C ,
C urre nt Li m.
Lo ca l E ne rg y S up e rvi so ry:
11 mA
Lo ca l E ne rg y Lo a d :
Ma ste r B o x Tri p C urre nt
0.25 A mp s. typ i ca l
System power specifications are outlined in Table 1-1.
*Refer to Appendix A for total system power and AC branch
circuit requirements.
August 1999
1-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 2
OPERATION
2-1
When an Alarm returns to a normal state (Alarm Off), the buzzer
will sound in a pulsed fashion, the alarm off condition must be
acknowledged to silence the buzzer. During the Trouble Off
condition, the audible device provides no sound. The following
summarizes the buzzer operation:
INTRODUCTION
This chapter describes the PEGAsys system controls and indicators located on the display panel. It also describes the
operating procedures and menu system.
2-2.1
Modes of Operation
There are two modes of PEGAsys system operation:
•
•
In the default operation the panel will be set to latch all
alarm inputs on the system. The latching operation will not
allow the loop input devices to generate an "alarm off" signal that would possibly interrupt a discharge time delay
sequence. To return the panel to normal the "RESET" button will need to be pushed.
•
Alarm condition is indicated by a continuous ON signal,
•
Alarm OFF is indicated by a ½ second ON ½ second OFF
signal,
•
Trouble condition is indicated by a 1 second ON and 1 second OFF continuous beeping,
Every individual change of status must be individually acknowledged by pressing the ACKLDGE (acknowledge) pushbutton
to silence the Audible device.
The second mode of operation is non-latching. This option
can be enabled, using the PCS (PEGAsys Configuration
Software) to define if a loop device input is to be non-latching. The non-latching operation will allow the loop input
devices to generate an "Alarm Off" signal to the panel. When
this signal is received the panel would interrupt the discharge time delay sequence of operation. However, all outputs that had been activated previous to the "Alarm Off"
signal will remain on and latched until the panel is reset.
2-2
CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
The control and indicators of the PEGAsys system are located
on the display panel, shown in Figure 2-1. The display panel is
mounted on top of the CCM. To gain access to the CCM, the
panel door must be open. Table 2-1 lists controls and indicators
for the display unit, giving name and functional description.
2-2.1
The advantage of offering a latching or non-latching operation
per loop input device, allows the installer/designer to customize the system. This allows the inter mixing of latching and nonlatching devices to protect critical areas where both type may
be specified
LCD Display
The display panel contains an 80-character (2X40) alphanumeric display. This LCD display is used to present system status. In the procedure section of this chapter there will be several
System Status
POWER ON
ALARM
TROUBLE
SUPERVISORY
GROUND FAULT
PREALARM
CPU ERROR
SILENCE
ACKLDGE
SILENCE
SCROLL
DRILL
RESET
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Figure 2-1. System Front Panel
76-100016-001
2-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
simulated LCD display readouts. The LCD display readouts
will be used to aid users in the operation of the system.
2-2.2
c.
NOTE: Use the default password, if a new password has not
been set.
Audible Device
The Display Panel also contains an audible device which generates two separate audible tones, one for alarms and one for
troubles. This device sounds continuously when a new alarm
condition is received until the condition is acknowledged. It also
sounds intermittently when a trouble, supervisory, or pre-alarm
condition is received until the condition is acknowledged.
d.
2-2.3
2-4
Control and Indicator Description
The PEGAsys system provides three distinct levels of program
protection, as required by UL Standard 864. The user can only
access the system by entering a valid password. Typical valid
passwords consist of three or four characters but may be up to
eight characters in length.
Levels of Security
a.
Perform the installation check-out procedure in Chapter 7
of this manual.
b.
Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify that
the display reads "Main Processor Power On" and that the
CPU ERROR indicator is lit. Ensure that the audible device
is buzzing continuously.
c.
Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the CPU
ERROR indicator is extinguished and the audible device is
silenced.
d.
Verify that the display reads as follows:
e.
NOTE: For multi-loop systems only. The above and below RX/
TX messages will repeat themselves for each RX/TX
module installed in the system. The above message
will be displayed while the system is initializing itself.
This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.
To clear the below RX/TX message use the AutoLearn
function from the menu function or upload the
configuration from the PCS program. If using PCS
software, verify that the correct number of RX/TX loops
are enabled in the Loops Topic of the configuration file
prior to uploading.
Default Passwords
The PEGAsys system provides protection from unauthorized
entry to the system menus by utilizing two levels of default passwords, level one and level two. This feature provides two separate passwords which increases the security of the system.
Default passwords are set when the system is shipped from
Kidde. These default passwords are:
RX/TX 1 NOT REGISTERED ON
RX/TX LOOP 1
f.
Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators are
lit.
g.
Connect the backup batteries to the CCP in accordance to
the procedure in Chapter 7.
h.
Press the ACKLDGE pushbutton. After approximately one
minute the display will momentarily read :
Level One = 987
Level Two = 1865
These default passwords are valid until other passwords are
programmed into the system.
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF
Entering Passwords
The password entry procedure is listed below:
a.
Verify that the system status is displayed.
b.
Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
i.
Verify the display reads the incorrect time and date.
j.
Set time and date as follows:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the default 1st level password (987).
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
August 1999
After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as follows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
If alphanumeric passwords are necessary for a particular application, it is recommended that the Level One password be numeric and the Level Two password be alphanumeric so as to
allow the user to retrieve system information (system information lists) and also prevent a user from changing any programmed system parameters.
2-3.3
SYSTEM POWER-UP
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
The three security levels are: Level One, Level Two, and System Manufacturer. The highest security level is reserved for the
system manufacturer. System owner is level one, system installer is level two. Passwords consist of numeric characters (0
- 9) which allows access from the integral keypad of the CCM.
Alphanumeric characters can only be used with the PCS program and if used they will lock out any possible entry using the
CCM keypad to gain entrance to the menus.
2-3.2
2:LIST
4:TEST
The following step-by-step procedure is for initial power-up of
the CCP.
SYSTEM SECURITY
2-3.1
↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
Press the return (↵
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
Refer to Table 2-1 for complete description of controls and indicators.
2-3
Type in three or four digit password into keypad. Ensure a
pound sign (#) appears for each key pressed.
2-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 2-1. Control and Indicators
LED
FUNCTION
POWER ON
When illuminated, indicates that the system is receiving AC input power. When
off, indicates an AC input power failure has occurred (trouble condition) and the
system has switched to a battery standby condition.
ALARM
When illuminated, indicates an alarm condition has been reported by an input
device.
TROUBLE
When illuminated, indicates a trouble condition exists in the system.
SUPERVISORY
When illuminated, indicates a supervisory condition has been reported by a
system-input device programmed for supervisory input.
GROUND FAULT
When illuminated, indicates a ground fault has been detected on the 24 VDC line
by the power supply monitor. The LCD will display either + / -.
PRE-ALARM
When illuminated, indicates a smoke or heat detector has sensed a level of smoke
or heat which exceeds the pre-alarm setpoint.
CPU ERROR
When illuminated, indicates CCM software has failed. The system defaults to
Zone Alarm / General Signal status.
SILENCE
When illuminated, indicates the Signal/Audible outputs have been silenced.
SWITCH
FUNCTION
ACKNOWLEDGE
When pressed after an Alarm ON (Alarm OFF if input device is set for nonlatching) Trouble, supervisory, or pre-alarm ON condition has occured, it silences
the panel's audible buzzer. The "ALARM", "TROUBLE", "SUPERVISORY", or
"PRE-ALARM" LED indicator glows steady to indicate that the condition has
been acknowledged. Subsequent conditions will cause the panel to resound the
above sequence.
SILENCE
When pressed after acknowledging current Alarm, it silences the system signal
outputs which have been programmed as silenceable. The "SILENCE" indicator
illuminates to indicate that the signal outputs have been silenced. Pressing the
"SILENCE" switch does not effect the Relay Output status.
RESET
When pressed after all active alarms have been acknowledged and cleared, the
system:
Resets auxiliary 24 VDC outputs used to power 4 wire detectors
Resets all latched alarm conditions.
Returns all relays to their normal state.
Displays "System Reset" on the visual display.
Turns the "ALARM" and "ZONE ALARM" indicators off.
SCROLL
When pressed during an active alarm, trouble, or supervisory condition, will cause
the LCD to scroll through the active event buffer(s). The Alarm condition will not
allow supervisory or troubles to be viewed. Supervisory condition will not allow
the troubles buffer to be viewed.
DRILL
When pressed and held for five seconds, the system will activate all signal
outputs which have been programmed for drill activation.
NUMERIC KEYPAD (1-0)
Use to enter password and system information into the menu system.
BACKSPACE
Use to exit the menu system and to correct wrong entries.
RETURN
Used as the Enter key when using the menu system.
76-100016-001
2-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
2:LIST
4:TEST
2-5.3
To exit the system's menus, perform the following steps:
(4) Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display
reads:
a.
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
b.
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM
2:PM
(6) Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for PM).
2-5.4
PEGAsys has a built-in menu structure. This menu structure
has been implemented to aid users with system operating functions. The following paragraphs describe the menu structure,
accessing the menu, exiting the menu and menu functions. Figure 2-2 shows the system's Level One menu structure. Figure
2-3 shows the system's Level Two menu structure.
Most functions will require that you enter additional data to implement the function, such as a device address or desired alarm
threshold.
Menu Structure
The PEGAsys menu structure consists of a main menu, and
multiple sub-level menus. The sub-level menus may also contain multiple sub-level menus. The main menu displays after
you enter a valid password. You can also access the Top Level
menu from any sub-level menu at almost anytime by pressing
the backspace key located on the keypad.
2-5.4.1
2-5.4.2
It is possible to access a previous higher level menu from a
lower level menu by pressing the backspace key.
LIST MENU FUNCTION
The list menu function (Table 2-3) permits the operator to list
various system parameters. All lists are real time actual system
conditions which are displayed and printed with the time and
date.
The choices of available sub menus after a valid password has
been entered, correspond to the security level password that
has been entered.
2-5.4.3
The main menu for the 1st level, 2nd level, and Manufacturer
security level is:
SET MENU FUNCTION
The set menu function permits the operator to program various
system parameters within the system. A few examples are shown
in Table 2-4.
2:LIST
4:TEST
2-5.4.4
Any one of the basic functions listed in a main menu can be
selected by pressing the numeric key of the system’s keypad
which corresponds to the desired function. (Example: To select
the LIST function from the main menu, press the 2 key on the
system keypad.) You also select lower level functions from sublevel menus using the numeric keys.
TEST MENU FUNCTION
The test menu function, shown in Table 2-5, allows the operator
to test individual or a group of field devices. On command, a
detector or contact input device can be tested, and results will
be printed and displayed at the Central Control Panel. The Test
procedure in the device is activated by imposing a signal within
the device that will cause an alarm output. The Control Panel
verifies that an alarm output is generated and reports “Test
Result OK” for each device.
Accessing the System Menus
Perform the steps in Paragraph 2-3.3.
August 1999
ISOLATE MENU FUNCTION
The isolate menu function (Table 2-2) permits the operator to
isolate field devices and output modules. Isolating any device
immediately places the system in a trouble condition, and initiates an audible trouble alarm and a printout with the time, date,
and device isolated. The feature is typically used to temporarily
isolate auxiliary devices during a system test.
NOTE: The top level menu may not be available by using the
backspace key while certain types of programming are
being performed.
2-5.2
Menu Functions
Tables 2-2 through 2-5 list and provide a brief description of all
functions that you can perform using the PEGAsys system’s
menus. In addition, the tables provide the security access level
and a keystroke formula for each function. The keystroke formula is a sequence of numbers you enter via the system’s keypad to access a particular function. These formulas provide the
path from the main menu to the desired function. Formulas are
provided for each access level. After you enter the formula, some
of the functions require you to press the return key to start implementing the function.
SYSTEM MENUS
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
Press the backspace key. Verify that the system returns to
standby. The display should read:
NOTE: When exiting the system menus, if the system is normal
the display panel should show the time and date as
shown in the above step.
The power-up procedure is complete at this point. The system is now ready for loop device registration and programming which is covered in this chapter.
2-5.1
2:LIST
4:TEST
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL HH:MM MM-DD YR
40 CHARACTER CUSTOM MESSAGE
NOTE: If there has been a mistake in the entered data, press
the backspace key as many times as required to get to
the mistake, then re-enter data from that point.
2-5
Press the backspace key as many times necessary to reach
the top level menu, shown in the top of the next column:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
(5) Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then MM=minutes
0-59). Press the return key. Verify that the display reads:
k.
Exiting the System Menus
2-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
2-6
b.
MODES OF OPERATION
The 80-character display will cycle between all currently
active alarms. Example:
The PEGAsys system has four modes of operation. Each mode
has different indications and action required. The following Paragraphs describe each mode, indications and action if required.
2-6.1
Normal Standby Mode
This is the typical mode of the system. In this mode, no alarm,
trouble, or supervisory conditions exist in the system. The system display will show the time, day of the week, and date. For
example:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
NOTE: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the Device Address “1000
- 8000” will be displayed depending on which RX/TX
module detects the zone alarm.
The system provides an option which allows the System Status
Normal message to be replaced with a display of battery charging voltage and current for the system standby batteries. For
example:
b.
PS01_26.0 V_0.10_A_ _ _ _ _11:06 AM_05-04-90
40_CHARACTER_CUSTOM_MESSAGE
The green AC POWER LED will be illuminated to indicate that
the system’s main power source is normal.
2-6.2.2 ALARM MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is
set into alarm.
NOTE: In the Normal Standby Operation state, it is possible
for the 80-character display to show data other than
the time, day of date. This occurs when the system
menus are being accessed either locally or remotely
through one of its serial ports. This condition will be
indicated by the menu selections being displayed on
the display panel being illuminated.
In the Normal Standby Mode, no indicating LED’s will be illuminated other than the “AC POWER.”
2-6.2
The outputs which have been previously programmed for
activation upon alarm by the specific devices will be turned
on. (Example: Signal audible signaling devices, control relays for HVAC shutdown or elevator recall.)
Active Alarm Mode
The system enters an alarm mode if a device (or devices) has
detected an alarm condition, such as smoke / heat above the
alarm threshold level. There are two types of alarms which can
occur:
Device Alarm
a.
Press the display panel’s ACKLDGE pushbutton to acknowledge the displayed alarm condition. The 80-character display will continue to cycle between any remaining alarms
which have not been acknowledged. The “ACKNOWLEDGE” switch must be operated once for each alarm received at the panel.
b.
Once all current alarms have been acknowledged, the alarm
indicating circuits (audible devices) can be silenced by operating the “SILENCE” switch.
c.
After all of the current alarms have been acknowledged,
verify that the display reads: XXX ALARMS REMAIN. The
“XXX” representing the total of all active alarms. All active
alarms can be viewed on the display by pressing the scroll
pushbutton.
NOTE: The first 64 alarms will only be displayed. Subsequent
alarms over the initial 64 will not be displayed, even
when any or all of the first 64 alarms clear. However,
all alarms regardless of total will be processed in the
EOC. For a complete list of active alarms access the
event buffer menu using the CCM keypad.
An alarm in which a device has communicated the alarm status
properly to the Central Control Panel, by providing the alarmed
device address for indication to the operator.
Zone Alarm
An alarm condition detected by one or several devices, but which
cannot be reported by a specific device due to a malfunction in
communications between the system and the alarmed device(s).
This is a redundant feature to increase system reliability and is
called Failsoft Mode.
d.
Any subsequent alarms will cause the alarm audible circuits to resound. Each additional alarm must be acknowledged before the alarm indicating circuits can be silenced.
e.
When a device goes out of alarm, the display will indicate
the device address and an alarm off (AOF) message (nonlatching mode). Example:
NOTE: A device can signal a zone alarm to the system during
some communication failures.
1080 AOF_ _ _ _PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTOR
40_CHARACTER_LOCATION_MESSAGE
2-6.2.1 ALARM MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates the system is in its alarm mode of operation.
NOTE: If the alarm is a zone alarm, the address “1000-8000”
will be displayed, indicating that active device(s) in
failsoft mode in the zone have gone out of alarm.
a.
f.
The red “ALARM” LED will be illuminated and there will be
a continuous audible signal by the system buzzer at the
panel.
76-100016-001
2-5
Each device which goes out of alarm must be acknowledged with the ACKLDGE pushbutton (non-latching).
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Please Enter Password
1:ISOLATE
2:LIST
3:SET
4:TEST
1:LoopDevices
1:IsolatedDevices/Outputs
1:Time - Date
1:Lamp Test
2:SignalOutputs
2:EventBuffer
2:PrinterControl
2:Loop Device(Alarm Test)
3:RelayOutputs
3:Detector Level
4:Release Outputs
4:Active Events
5:City TieOutput
5:Programming
6:Digital I/O
6:Assignments
3:Battery Test
7:Voltages
Figure 2-2. Level One Menu Structure
August 1999
2-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Please Enter Password
1:ISOLATE
2:LIST
3:SET
4:TEST
1:Loop Devices
1:Isolated Devices/Outputs
1:Time - Date
1:Lamp Test
2:Signal Outputs
2:EventBuffer
2:Printer
2:Loop Device(Alarm Test)
3:Relay Outputs
3:DetectorLevel
3:Devices
3:Battery Test
4:Release Outputs
4:Active Events
4:Programming
4:WalkTest
5:CityTieOutput
5:Programming
5:Unused
6:Digital I/O
6:GlobalI/O
6:Assignments
7:Global
6:GlobalI/O
7:Voltages
5:Alarm Simulation Test
Figure 2-3. Level Two Menu Structure
76-100016-001
2-7
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 2-2. Isolate Menu Function
Function
Description
Formula
Access
Level
Isolate Loop Device
Isolate/De-isolate an RCU by address
1-1
1/2/M
Isolate I/O Module Signal Output
Isolate/De-isolate a signal module output circuit by address
1-2-1
1/2/M
Isolate I/O Module Release Signal Output Isolate/De-isolate a release module signal output by address.
1-2-2
1/2/M
Isolate CCM Signal Output
Isolate/De-isolate A CCM signal output
1-2-3
1/2/M
Isolate I/O Module Relay Output
Isolate/De-isolate a I/O module relay output by address
1-3-1
1/2/M
Isolate CCM Relay Output
Isolate/De-isolate CCM relay output
1-3-2
1/2/M
Isolate I/O Module Release Output
Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by output address
1-4-1
1/2/M
Isolate CCM Agent Release Output
Isolate/De-isolate an agent release output by CCM output
address
1-4-2
1/2/M
Isolate City Tie Output
Isolate/De-isolate city tie module by output address
1-5
1/2/M
Isolate Digital Input/Output
Isolate/De-isolate digital input/output by I/O address
1-6
1/2/M
Global Isolate Inputs
Isolate/De-isolate all system input loop devices; I/O modules
1-7-1
2/M
Global Isolate Outputs
Isolate/De-isolate all system output I/O modules
1-7-2
2/M
NOTE:
1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL
Table 2-3. List Menu Function
Function
Formula
Access
Level
List Isolated Loop Devices
List all Loop Devices which are isolated
2-1-1-1
1/2/M
List Isolated I/O Modules
List all I/O modules which are isolated
2-1-2-1
1/2/M
List Isolated CCM outputs
List all CCM outputs which are isolated
2-1-2-2
1/2/M
List Event History Buffer(All
Events)
Lists all recorded event history entries from buffer
2-2-1
1/2/M
List Event History
Buffer(Range of Events)
Lists a user selectable range of event history entries by
date
2-2-2
1/2/M
List a Single Detector
Displays a selected detector’s real time smoke / heat level
2-3-1
1/2/M
List Detector Level
Lists all system detectors pre-alarm and alarm setpoints
and present level.
2-3-2
1/2/M
List Active Alarm(s)
List all active system alarm(s).
2-4-1
1/2/M
List Active Supervisory
Conditions
List all active system supervisory conditions.
2-4-2
1/2/M
List Active Trouble Condition
List all active system trouble conditions
2-4-3
1/2/M
List EOC Program
List EOC program lines
2-5-1
1/2/M
List RTC Program
List RTC program lines
2-5-2
1/2/M
List Loop Device Addresses
List all loop devices registered into the system
2-6-1
1/2/M
List I/O Module Addresses
List all I/O modules registered into the system
2-6-2
1/2/M
List PC Line Voltage Levels
Lists PC line voltage levels at each specified loop device
2-7-1
1/2/M
List Loop Device 9VDC
power supply level
Lists specified loop device 9 volt power supply level
2-7-2
1/2/M
NOTE:
August 1999
Description
1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL
2-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 2-4. Set Menu Function
Function
Description
Formula
Access
Level
Set System Time
Allows user to set system time
3-1-1
1/2/M
Set System Date
Allows user to set system date
3-1-2
1/2/M
Set Display of Battery(V+I)
Allow user to set display of battery charging voltage and
current.
3-1-3
1/2/M
Set Internal Printer
Enable port for internal printer connection
3-2-1-1
1/2/M
Disable Internal Printer
Disable port for internal printer connection
3-2-1-2
1/2/M
Set External Printer
Enable port for external printer connection
3-2-2-1
1/2/M
Disable External Printer
Disable port for external printer connection
3-2-2-2
1/2/M
Set Device Address
Allows user to change device address.
3-3-1
2/M
Set Ionization Detector
Sensitivity
Allows user to adjust Ionization detector Prealarm and alarm
settings
3-3-2-1
2/M
Set Photoelectric Detector
Sensitivity
Allows user to adjust Photoelectric detector Prealarm and alarm
settings
3-3-2-2
2/M
Set Thermal Detector
Sensitivity
Allows user to adjust Thermal detector Prealarm and alarm
settings
3-3-2-3
2/M
Register Devices
Allows user to register loop devices into system configuration
3-3-3
2/M
De-Register Devices
Allows user to de-register loop devices from system
configurations.
3-3-4
2/M
Blink Control
Allows user to disable detector LED blinking
3-3-5
2/M
Set Day/Night Mode
Allows user to enable detector for day function.
3-4-1-1
2/M
Set Day / Night Periods
Allows user to set Day / Night periods
3-4-1-2
2/M
Activate Day Mode
Allows user to activate Day mode
3-4-1-3
2/M
Set 1st level Password
Allows user to set 1st level password
3-4-2-1
2/M
Set 2nd level Password
Allows user to set 2nd level password.
3-4-2-2
2/M
Enable RTC Program
Allows user to enable RTC program line to function
3-4-3-1
2/M
Disable RTC Program
Allows user to disable RTC program line from functioning.
3-4-3-2
2/M
Set AutoLearn Mode
Allows user to activate the AutoLearn Function
3-4-4
2/M
Set Alarm Verification
Allows user to set the alarm verification function and time period
for individual detectors or range of detectors.
3-4-5
2/M
Set PAS Function
Allows user to set the positive alarm sequence for devices
3-4-6
2/M
Clear Event Log
Allows user to clear event history buffer entries
3-4-7
2/M
Global Acknowledge Enable
Enables the Global Acknowledge Feature
3-8-1
2/M
Global Acknowledge Disable
Disnables the Global Acknowledge Feature
3-8-2
2/M
NOTES:
1. For installation in the state of California, Alarm Verification Time must not exceed 30 seconds.
2. 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL
76-100016-001
2-9
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 2-5. Test Menu Functions
Function
Description
Formula
Access
L evel
Lamp Test
Enable user to test system LEDs functionality
4-1
1/2/M
Loop Device Test
Allows user to activate an electronic test of a detector or
group of detectors
4-2-1
1/2/M
Battery Test
Allows user to activate a battery test to verify battery capacity
4-3
1/2/M
Enable Walk Test
Allows user to specify a range of devices to Walk Test
4-4-1
2/M
Disable Walk Test
Allows user to disable walk test mode
4-4-2
Alarm Simulation Test
Allows installer to verify programmed relation ship of inputs to
outputs by activating inputs and verifying outputs are active.
4-5
NOTE:
2/M
1. WARNING: The Alarm Simulation Test must be used with care. When activated the Alarm Simulation Test (AST)
processes pre-programmed outputs which are related to the activated (simulated) input device. Before using AST ensure
that any associated outputs are disconnected or isolated to prevent unexpected outputs (releases, signals or shutdowns).
2. 1 = LEVEL ONE, 2 = LEVEL TWO, M = MANUFACTURER LEVEL
For latching mode: To return the system to normal, press
the RESET button once. If powering 4-wire detector from
the PEGAsys, the reset button will need to be pushed once
to reset the detector and once to reset the panel to a normal condition.
g.
In a non-latching operation once all alarms have cleared,
the display will read: NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS. At
this time, the system may be reset by operating the RESET
pushbutton.
h.
When the system is properly reset, the display will show
the System Status Normal message, time, day and date.
The preceding will happen if no active troubles or
supervisories are present, in which case the “Active
Troubles” or “Active Supervisories” message will be displayed.
2-6.3
2-6.3.2 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is
set into supervisory trouble mode of operation:
Active Supervisory Trouble Mode
The system enters supervisory trouble mode when it detects an
abnormal condition on the system that has been defined to be a
much higher priority than a common trouble. This type of trouble
is usually assigned by the installer/designer to monitor critical
parts of the system.
a.
To silence the supervisory trouble audible signal, all current supervisories must be acknowledged by pressing the
ACKLDGE push button. This will silence the system buzzer.
b.
When all supervisory trouble conditions have been acknowledged, the 80 character display will read: XXX ACTIVE
SUPERVISORY TROUBLES REMAIN. XXX representing
the total number of active supervisory troubles. All current
trouble conditions can be viewed on the display by pressing the scroll push button.
c.
As each supervisory trouble condition is cleared, the display will read one less active trouble until all supervisories
are clear. When all active supervisory troubles have been
cleared, the SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE LEDs will be
extinguished and the 80 character display will show the
Standby Message. (For example: "System Status Normal")
2-6.3.1 SUPERVISORY TROUBLE MODE INDICATION
The following indicates the system is in the supervisory trouble
mode of operation.
a.
The yellow SUPERVISORY and TROUBLE LEDs will be
flashing at a 1 second rate and there will be a pulsing buzzer
at the CCM. This audible is distinctively different than an
alarm signal pattern at the CCM.
b.
The 80 character display will cycle between all currently
active supervisory troubles. Example:
August 1999
NOTE:
2-10
The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global basis.
The panel by default will require that each trouble be
acknowledged individually. However, if the installer
wishes to enable this function it can be done by
accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM
keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on
stepping through the menus to enable and disable
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
c.
the Global Acknowledge function. With global
acknowledge a total of 30 troubles can be
acknowledged at one time.
2-6.4
Active Trouble Mode
NOTE: The system has the option to acknowledge both
supervisory and common troubles on a global basis.
The panel by default will require that each trouble be
acknowledged individually. However, if the installer
wishes to enable this function it can be done by
accessing the "set" menu option using the CCM
keypad. Refer to Table 2-4 for more information on
stepping through the menus to enable and disable the
Global Acknowledge function. With global acknowledge
a total of 30 troubles can be acknowledged at one time.
The system enters trouble mode when it detects an abnormal
condition which may prevent proper operation or display a
prealarm condition. (Example: loss of communications with a
smoke detector.) Refer to Appendix G for a complete list of
trouble conditions.
2-6.4.1 TROUBLE MODE INDICATIONS
The following indicates the system is in its trouble mode of
operation.
a.
b.
As each trouble condition is cleared, the display will read one
less active trouble until all troubles are cleared. When all active troubles have been cleared, the “TROUBLE” LED will be
extinguished and the 80-character display will show the
standby message (For example: "System Status Normal").
The yellow TROUBLE LED will be flashing at a 1 second
rate and there will be a pulsing panel buzzer at the CCP.
This audible signal is distinctively different than the alarm
audible signal.
2-7
The 80 character display will cycle between all currently
active troubles and prealarms. Example:
PRINTING OPERATION
In addition to the LCD display, the PEGAsys system information can be viewed using the Printer port of the CCM. For detailed information pertaining to connecting a RS-232 peripheral
device, see the Chapter 7, Paragraph 7-18.
When the printer port is enabled and a serial printer is attached
the system will print out all status change information and any
system information lists that the user would request from the
system using the integral keypad.
Serial-type annunciator devices may be connected to the printer
port to provide graphical LED annunciator type indications to
building occupants. Contact Kidde application engineering for
compatible annunciator vendors.
2-6.4.2 TROUBLE MODE USER ACTION
The following steps should be performed when the system is
set into the trouble mode of operation:
a.
To silence the trouble audible signal, all current trouble
conditions must be acknowledged by pressing the
ACKLDGE pushbutton. This will silence the system buzzer.
b.
When all trouble conditions have been acknowledged, the
80-character display will read: XXX ACTIVE TROUBLES
REMAIN. XXX representing the total number of active
troubles. All current trouble conditions can be viewed on
the display by pressing the scroll pushbutton.
2-8
The PEGAsys fire alarm system incorporates two unique programming languages that are easy to understand and use.
These two versatile programming languages, Event Output
Control (EOC) and Real Time Control (RTC), can accommodate most any fire alarm control logic application. Programming
the system is accomplished by a personal computer via a system interface cable.
The two programs are constructed by the system Engineer/Installer using the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) program which is Windows™ based. The PCS program allows the
user to configure, verify, upload, download, edit, retrieve, store
and print the entire system configuration program. Refer to the
PCS user’s guide (P/N 76-014) for further details.
NOTE: The first 300 troubles (supervisory or common) on a
Single-Loop will be displayed only. Subsequent troubles
or supervisories will not be displayed even if any or all
300 troubles clear. However, all of the active troubles
or supervisories will be processed and entered into the
event buffer. For a complete listing of all troubles and
supervisories over the initial 300, access the event
buffer using the event buffer using the CCM keypad.
2-8.1
EOC Programming
The Event Output Control (EOC) program logically combines the
system’s input devices with the system's output devices. The program consists of sequentially numbered lines of equations containing input addresses, output addresses and logic operators.
When an input becomes true (Active), the system processes the
EOC program and activates any associated outputs as programmed.
For the Multi-Loop the first 2100 troubles or
supervisories will be displayed. Subsequent troubles
or supervisories over the first 2100 will not be displayed
even if any or all 2100 troubles or supervisories clear.
However, all troubles or supervisories regardless of the
total will be processed and entered into the event buffer.
For a complete listing of all active troubles and
supervisories, access the event buffer through the CCM
keypad.
76-100016-001
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING
2-11
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
EXAMPLE:
Each line number of the RTC Program is automatically enabled when
entered into the system. Once a line number in the RTC Program
has been disabled using the procedure below, the line will be ignored
by the RTC Program until enabled. To enable a line number which
has been previously disabled follow the below procedure selecting
"ENABLE" in step b.
The simplest event output control (EOC) equation would be:
Input = Output
A basic equation with one or more inputs would be :
Input Operator Input = Output
a.
The system normally processes the EOC from left to right. However,
in equations with parenthesis the contents of the parenthesis are
executed first. Refer to the PCS user’s guide (76-014) for further
details.
2-8.1.1
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
b.
LISTING EOC PROGRAMMING
c.
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
b.
2-8.3.2
2-8.3.3
LISTING RTC PROGRAMMING
RX/TX LOOPS
RX/TX loop (zone) alarms occur if a loop device alarm initiates under
one of the following conditions:
Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
2:LIST
4:TEST
•
Failed communications between the CCM and RX/TX module
(Trouble Condition)
•
Failed RX/TX processor. (Trouble Condition)
•
Failed input circuit of RCU device.
An alarmed input device on the RX/TX (in FailSoft mode) can only
activate EOC programming if the RX/TX zone is used as a programmed input (ZA1=1000, ZA2=2000, ZA8 = 8000, etc.).
Select the list RTC program by typing the function formula, 2-52.
2-8.3.4
The system will then list all lines of the Real Time Control programming on the LCD and any attached printer.
SYSTEM OUTPUTS
Devices which are classified as system outputs are CCM - signals and relays (programmable / non programmable); I/O modules - signal outputs, relay outputs, agent release outputs, release
ENABLE/DISABLE RTC PROGRAM LINE NUMBERS
August 1999
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (RCU)
The system specifies the RX/TX loop controller using its loop number followed by three zeros (1000 for RX/TX 1) in single loop systems and (1000 - 8000) in multi-loop systems. The specifier (1000
-8000) will appear in cases when trouble conditions are present on a
particular RX/TX loop controller (i.e., a PC Line Short on RX/TX 1 would be displayed as "RX/TX PC Line Short Loop 1").
The RTC program can be listed out using either the owners or installers menu functions. To list the RTC programming:
2-8.2.2
SYSTEM INPUTS
The RCU input and output devices, which are connected to the RX/
TX loop(s), are specified in EOC programming by the devices four
digit address.
The program consists of sequentially numbered lines each containing control object, control content, time, date and day of week. For
further details refer to the PCS user’s guide.
b.
Types of Inputs and Outputs
Devices which are classified as system inputs are smoke detectors,
heat detectors, and addressable contact monitors (alarm, trouble,
abort, waterflow, manual alarm, manual release, supervisory, and
normal). Refer to the PCS user’s (76-014) guide for further details.
RTC Programming
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
You may continue with another RTC line or press backspace
key to cancel this function.
2-8.3.1
The RTC program language permits outputs to be controlled by the
system’s real time clock. Outputs may be programmed to occur on
an hour, day, week and month time control basis. Alarm and Prealarm
threshold levels of all or individual detectors can be increased or decreased in sensitivity (within UL limits) under RTC control. The RTC
programming also provides the ability to control RCU relays, I/O
module Relays and smoke detector pre alarm and alarm set points.
a.
Type the three digit line number and press the return key.
e.
The PEGAsys has various input and output devices/modules which
are discussed in the following paragraphs:
The system will then list all lines of the Event Output Control programming on the LCD and any attached printer.
2-8.2.1
d.
2-8.3
2:LIST
4:TEST
Select the list EOC program by typing the function formula, 2-51.
2-8.2
Select the desired choice and press return. Verify the display
reads:
RTC LINE NUMBER _ _ _
Access PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
Select the set RTC program by typing the function formula, 3-43. Verify the display reads:
1:ENABLE 2:DISABLE
The system's Event Output Control (EOC) program can be listed
out using either the owner's or installer's menu functions. To list the
systems EOC programming:
a.
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
2-12
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
there were eight in the system, and the same holds true for the
remaining modules with the only exception being the City Tie module there can only be one of these modules in a system at any
time.
signal outputs, city tie outputs and digital I/O module outputs; Loop
devices - addressable relay output module.
2-8.3.5 SYSTEM I/O MODULES
The Input/Output modules which the systems support are Signal
Outputs, Relay Outputs, Agent Release (agent & signal) outputs
and the City Tie output.
2-8.4
2-8.5
I/O modules are registered into the system configuration through
the use of the PCS program. The installer would configure all
modules in the PCS program file and then upload this file to the
system which would then internally verify the existence of the specified modules. For further details on I/O module registration refer
to the PCS user’s guide.
Addressing I/O Modules
The I/O modules include: Signal Audible, Relay Output, Agent
Release Output, City Tie output and the power supply module.
I/O modules refer to any I/O module which installs into the optional I/O mother board with exception of the power supply
module(s). The I/O modules communicate with the CCM over
the I/O bus.
Added RX/TX Modules in the multi-loop systems are automatically registered by the CCM upon system power-up.
2-8.5.1 LISTING I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENT
Each module has inputs or outputs which can be individually
addressed. The I/O address consists of two alphabetic and two
numeric characters which define the module type, address and
I/O circuit number. The I/O module address scheme is shown
below.
SG 1 : 3
All I/O modules which are programmed into the system configuration may be listed out with the use of either the owners or
installers menu functions.
a.
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
Module Address (1-8),
See note 2.
Module Type,
See note 3.
SG - Signal / Audible Output
•
RY - Relay Output
•
CT - City Tie Output
•
AR - Agent Release Output
•
RS - Release Signal Output
•
PS - Power Supply Monitor Module
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
b.
2:LIST
4:TEST
Select the list I/O address assignments by typing the function formula, 2-6-2.
The system will then list all of the registered I/O module addresses on the LCD and any attached printer.
2-8.6
Addressing RCUs
RCUs refer to all devices which connect and operate from the
RX/TX PC (power/communications) Line. These devices include
SmartOne smoke detectors, SmartOne heat detectors, addressable contact input monitors, and addressable output contact
modules.
NOTES:
1. The I/O modules vary in amount of inputs and outputs. Refer
to section one “component description” for thorough descriptions of options.
Each device has a three digit numeric address. This address is
stored in the non-volatile EEPROM memory of the device. The
system address is defined by the CCM by these three digits
and a fourth digit representing the RX/TX channel number.
2. The PEGAsys system can support a total of 16 I/O modules
for single loop and 23 I/O modules for multi-loop, 8 maximum of
any one type.
There are three ways to address the RCU (Loop) devices.
3. Power supply monitors only need an address, they have no
need for an output number.
The I/O module address is set using the three dip switches contained on each PCB assembly, each module uses different numbered switches for module address assignment. The address
is set during the installation procedure by placing the switches
into the correct position. Refer to the appropriate figure in Appendix I for the particular module you are working with and the
addressing matrix. For a functional description of each module,
refer to Chapter 3.
•
The RCUs can be addressed using the Hand Held Programmer (P/N 74-200013-001). This optional unit provides
a convenient means of addressing RCUs without using the
CCM.
•
The user may address the devices individually on the system by performing the procedure listed below.
To address RCUs using the “SET RCU Address” menu function
each unaddressed RCU’s must be connected to the RX/TX PC
line one at a time. Perform the following steps for each RCU:
a.
The switches would be set for each type of module in order. For
example signal modules would be addressed 1 -8 if there were
eight in the system, relay modules would be addressed 1 - 8 if
76-100016-001
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
I/O Circuit Number (1-4),
See note 1.
•
Registering I/O Module Assignments
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
2-13
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
b.
2:LIST
4:TEST
tion would be to attach all pre addressed loop devices to the PC line
of the RX/TX module. Power up the system (if it is not already running). As the loop devices power up they will begin to communicate
with the RX/TX module. The CCM will recognize the loop devices as
not being not registered and raise a trouble for each not registered
(TBL NR) device attached. When the register RCU function is enabled the CCM will prompt the user to enter a range of loop device
addresses to register as valid system devices. At the conclusion of
the register function the CCM will display the total amount of devices
registered.
Select the set RCU address function by typing the function
formula, 3-3-1. Verify that the display reads:
PRESENT LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
NOTE: All new addressable devices have an address of zero
(000).
c.
Enter the present RCU address and press return
pushbutton. The system will display the following:
The AutoLearn function works much the same as the registration
function, where it will automatically enter the devices which it can
identify on the PC line of the RX/TX as not being registered into
system configuration memory.
TARGET LOOP DEVICE ADDRESS _ _ _ _
d.
Enter the desired address for the RCU / Detector, press
return. The system will now change the RCU address if
different than previously noted.
During both the Autolearn and RCU Registration procedures the
CCM will automatically register the loop devices into memory and
also set each device to default settings (Sensitivity levels and
Input reporting) for the particular device. The CCM will also set the
default operation of the CCM outputs (MP01, MP02, MP03 and
MP04). Any system alarm received after this time will cause all
the CCM outputs (MP01 - MP04) to activate.
The 40 character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
2-8.7
Registering RCUs
Optionally, if the I/O motherboard and I/O modules have been
installed, the PCS program will need to be used to configure the
system for use with the I/O modules. Procedures for registering I/
O modules are provided in the PCS Users Guide (See “Addressing I/O Modules”).
Registration is where the device address is joined with the device information in the system's memory. Device information is
comprised of; Device type, Device Messages and Device settings.
2-8.7.1 DETECTOR REGISTRATION
There are four ways to register the RCU (Loop) devices on to
the system.
•
The user may register the devices individually on the system
•
Register all pre-addressed RCU’s at once using RCU (Loop
Devices) registration function
•
Register all pre-addressed RCU’s using the Autolearn function, which sets all devices at default values and any system alarm input activates all system outputs. If pre-addressed
devices are used, multiple devices can be attached and registered to the system all at one time using either the Autolearn
or RCU Registration function.
•
SmartOne smoke and heat detectors would be registered on to
the system in the same fashion as the RCU’s explained in the
previous section. The only other information which requires selecting is detection devices application, the alarm and pre-alarm,
levels and latching or non-latching. There are three specific applications for smoke detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High
Air Flow) and Duct. The smoke and heat detectors pre-alarm and
alarm set points are adjusted only when necessary if the user
desires the set points to be different from the default values for
each detector type.
The detectors will use the default values unless otherwise programmed. To adjust the set points for the detectors, refer to Chapter
5 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat Detector Sensitivities.
RCU’s can also be registered into the system by using the
PCS program. The installer would specify each RCU to be
connected to the system and then upload the system configuration file to the system and then the system would supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS user’s guide
for further details on RCU registration.
1004
The 40 character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
2-8.7.2 ADDRESSABLE CONTACT MONITOR
REGISTRATION
001-255 = Device Address (registered)
000
= Device Address (un addressed/
un registered)
The addressable contact monitor are registered on to the system
in the same fashion as the RCU’s explained in the previous section. The system will by default, set the response of the device
activation to alarm. During system configuration using the PCS
program the following choices are allowed - Alarm, Trouble, Abort,
Supervisory, Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow or Normal. The following table describes the allowable selections for
the input RCU and their EOC relationships.
RXTX Loop Number
1 for single Loop Systems,
1-8 for Multi-Loop Systems
Example: RCU 1032 represents device 32 on RX/TX loop 1.
Connecting an unregistered RCU address (address 000) to the
RX/TX will result in a not registered trouble (TBL NR) indicating
that the control panel has communicated with the device and identified the device as being unregistered.
Contact monitor RCUs are also registered into the system by
using the PCS program. The installer would specify each Contact
Monitor RCU to be connected to the system and then upload the
system configuration file to the system and then the system would
supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS user’s guide
Procedures for registering RCU devices using the register RCU func-
August 1999
2-14
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
a.
for further details on RCU registration.
1: Alarm
Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
Active input initiates an alarm at the central control
panel and is latched in the EOC until the system is
reset after alarm has cleared.
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
2: Trouble
Active input initiates a trouble at the central control
panel, but does not latch EOC programming and will
self restore upon deactivation.
b.
3: Abort
Active input initiates an abort condition at the central
control panel. This will delay agent release if countdown has begun. It does not latch EOC program and
will self restore upon deactivation. There are 4 styles
of abort available for the device.
2:LIST
4:TEST
Select the List RCU address function by typing the function
formula, 2-6-1. Verify that the display and any attached printers list all registered RCU addresses.
2-8.7.5 UN-REGISTERING RCUs
The system provides the capability to remove a single device or
group of devices from the system configuration. This function
removes the device address from the system memory but leaves
the address in the device intact. Performing this operation will
cause the system to generate a trouble NR (Not Registered) for
any devices which remain connected to the RX/TX PC line.
Removal or disconnection of the device(s) from the PC line will
clear the trouble condition(s) on the system.
4: Waterflow
Active input initiates a waterflow alarm condition at the
central control panel and is latched in EOC program
until reset. Signal outputs will be inhibited from being silenced.
This function would be used during a system retrofit where some
devices may be desired to be removed from the system temporarily during a building renovation and then reattached after renovations are complete. This feature is very efficient because the
device maintains its address information which speeds device
reregistering after the renovations.
5: Manual Alarm
Active input initiates a manual alarm condition at the
central control panel, latches in EOC program until
reset.
6: Manual Release
Active input initiates a manual release condition at the
central control panel, causes instant release of programmed output, latches in EOC program until reset
To perform the device un-registering operation perform the following:
a.
7: Normal
Active input initiates a momentary display but does not
latch in EOC program, self restores.
Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
8: Supervisory
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
Active input initiates a supervisory trouble at the central control panel, but does not latch the EOC, and will
self-restore upon deactivation.
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
The 40 character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
b.
2:LIST
4:TEST
Select the set RCU De-Registration function by typing the
function formula, 3-3-4. Verify that the display reads:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
DEVICE FROM_ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
2-8.7.3 REMOTE RELAY REGISTRATION
c.
The addressable contact output device is registered in the
same fashion as the previous RCU's.
Enter the desired RCU address(s) and press return. The
display will read the following in response to verify the device de-registration:
DEVICE DE-REGISTRATION
XX DEVICES DE-REGISTERED
Contact Output RCU’s can also be registered into the system
by using the PCS program. The installer would specify each
Contact Output RCU to be connected to the system and then
upload the system configuration file to the system and then the
system would supervise each device specified. Refer to the PCS
user’s guide (76-014) for further details on RCU registration.
The 40-character owner location message cannot be entered
using the system keypad. The owners location message can
only be entered by use of the PCS program and uploaded into
system memory.
d.
Verify that the display changes to the device menu after 5
seconds. The backspace key can be pressed to return to
the main menu.
e.
To reregister RCU devices, perform the procedure which is outlined in the RCU registration paragraph in this chapter.
2-8.7.4 LISTING ALL REGISTERED RCUs
All RCUs registered on the system can be listed using either the
owners or installers menu function. To list all registered RCUs
76-100016-001
2-15
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
2-16
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 3
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
3-1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides a functional description of the devices/
modules used in the PEGAsys system configuration. Each functional description covers one of the blocks shown in the overall
block diagram, Figure3-1.
3-2
Central Control Module
•
Display Module
•
RX/TX Module
•
I/O Module
•
RCUs (Field Devices)
•
Power Supply Module
As described in Paragraph 1-1.2, the system comes in two configurations the single-loop system and multi-loop system. The
above devices/modules for both configurations are shown in
the Overall Functional Block Diagrams, Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
Each device/module is described in detail in Paragraph 3-3.
BLOCK DIAGRAM
The PEGAsys system is divided into seven functional blocks as
follows:
Display
Module
•
Central
Control
Module
RX/TX CCM
Comm
24 VDC
AC Line
Battery
Backup
I/O Bus
Power
Supply
Receiver/
Transmitter
Module
(RX/TX)
Power/Comm
Line
RCU's
(Field Devices)
24 VDC
I/O Bus
I/O Bus
Optional
I/O
Motherboard
24 VDC
24 VDC
Optional
I/O Module
Figure 3-1. Overall Block Diagram, Single-Loop System
Display
Module
Central
Control
Module
24 VDC
AC Line
Battery
Backup
I/O Bus
Power
Supply
I/O Bus
RX/TX CCM
Comm
24 VDC
RX/TX 24 VDC
RX/TX CCM
Comm
24 VDC
Multi-Loop I/O
Motherboard
I/O Bus
24 VDC
Receiver/
Transmitter
Module
(RX/TX)
Up to 8 RX/TX
Modules
Power/Comm
Line
RCU's
(Field Devices)
Optional
I/O Module
Figure 3-2. Overall Block Diagram, Multi-Loop System
76-100016-001
3-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
3-3
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the
system, examples: microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS232 port troubles, etc..
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
The functional descriptions will describe each device or module depicted in Figures 3-1 and 3-2.
3-3.1
Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 &
MP2) provided can be used for signaling devices (horns, strobes,
bells) and allow up to 2.0 amps of 24 VDC power. One of the
two outputs is programmed for releasing solenoid type suppression equipment (Agent and Sprinkler type systems).
Central Control Module
The Central Control Module (CCM) is available in two versions,
P/N 76-100008-501 for single-loop and P/N 76-100008-600 for
multi-loop. Figure 3-3 contains the main central processing unit,
real time clock, watch dog timer and RS-232 serial communication input/output ports. The CCM controls the operation and
supervision of all the system modules and software within the
PEGAsys system. It receives loop device data from the RX/TX
module, processes the data based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output commands to the output modules,
field devices and display module(s).
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 & MP4) are
provided on the CCM for controlling building functions during
alarm occurrences. These relay outputs are activated through
the EOC programming which allows system inputs to be related to system outputs. Each of these relays have Form C style,
rated at 1A, 30VDC.
One non programmable trouble relay is supplied which is normally powered (24 VDC) and will transfer on any system trouble,
supervisory, pre-alarm and complete power off condition. Form
C contact rating 1A at 30VDC. Refer to DWG. No. 06-235443001 in Appendix I for further installation details.
The CCM provides two RS-232C serial ports for programming
and monitoring the PEGAsys system. These ports accept 6wire RJ-12 modular connectors. The PCS program would be
used to interface to the system for programming purposes. A
multilevel password scheme protects the system from unauthorized access.
An event history buffer is provided on the CCM which will store
1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-loop of
system event information and allow the operator to retrieve this
information for review of system operation. The PCS program
provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portions
of the Event History Buffer.
The real time clock provides the CCM with the ability to display
the current time & date on the system LCD and control the system with time based programming.
TB4
CCM Reset
Button
REP 2
REP 1
See Note 1
SOUNDER 1
A
B
+
+
-
VOLT FREE RELAYS
1
2
NO NC C NO NC C
SOUNDER 2
A
B
+
+
-
TB5
TB1
TB2
Note 1: The trouble relay
contacts are shown in the
unpowered state.
V/F RELAY
FAULT
NO NC C
TB3
Note 2: Jumpers JP1-JP4 are
used to configure MP01 to be
signaling or releasing (default)
outputs. Refer to Dwg. No.
06-235443-001, in Appendix I,
for further details.
See Note 2
JP4
JP3
JP1
SW1
JK5
I/O
PORT
JP2
JK3
JK4
PLG2
24V 5V 0V
P.C.
PORT
PLG1
To External
Printer
DISPLAY
5V 0V
To Remote PC For
Programing
To I/O Modules and
Power Supplies
To RX/TX
Loop Controller
24VDC From
Power Supply
PLG3
24VDC From
Power Supply
TB6
PLG2
PLG6
SW1
Display Reset
JK3
PLG1
JK2
JK1
PLG2
Proc.
Port
Display
Port
EARTH
FLT
SUPPLY
FLT
PRINT
PORT
DISP
PORT
0V
TB6
1
24V
JK2
JK1
RX/TX
PORT
BT1
Figure 3-3. Central Control Module, Details
August 1999
3-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.2
Receiver/Transmitter Module (RX/TX)
The RX/TX receives control requests from the CCM and establishes communications with the loop devices. The RX/TX receives status changes from the loop devices and reports these
changes to the CCM. The RX/TX shown in Figure 3-4 is capable of communicating with up to 255 intelligent devices and
complies with the Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) requirements of
NFPA-72 Style 4, 6 & 7. Style 4 initiation circuit wiring will permit “T” tapping or branch circuitry. Style 7 requires the use of
optional loop isolator devices.
The RX/TX functions as the hardware & software interface between the loop devices and the CCM. Each installed RX/TX
module continually monitors all addressable devices for alarm
and trouble conditions. Each device is capable of initiating and
sending alarm and trouble messages to the RX/TX module to
which it is connected.
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit, with Loop Isolator
Zone 2
Loop
Isolator
Zone 1
Loop
Isolator
Zone 3
See Note
RX/TX
76-100005-001
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
1 2 3 4
24V
RET
24V
RET
LOOP ISOLATOR
Mounted to RX/TX
74-200012-001
CPU Reset
PC Line Normal
RX/TX
Loop Isolator
for Style 7
(74-200012-001)
CPU Reset
PC Line Reset
Note: Each zone can consist of 30 loop devices
between loop isolators
STYLE 7 Signal Line Circuit
Loop
Isolator
See Note
Loop
Isolator
Zone 2
Loop
Isolator
Loop
Isolator
Note: Refer to jumper table on Dwg. 06-235371-002 in appendix I
STYLE 6 Signal Line Circuit
Zone 1
1
2
3
4
See Note
Loop
Isolator
Zone 3
Loop
Isolator
STYLE 4 Signal Line Circuit
1
2
3
1 2 3 4
24V
RET
24V
RET
LOOP ISOLATOR
Mounted to RX/TX
74-200012-001
4
RX/TX
NOTE: Adjacent loop isolators must be within 20ft. Of a device with wiring in conduit
to be in accordance with NFPA Style 7 requirements.
Figure 3-4. Receiver/Transmitter Module, Details
76-100016-001
3-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
3-3.3
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Rev. A
The power supply/charger assembly is addressable and communicates with the CCM over the I/O bus.
This power supply assembly was provided with earlier systems.
Information is being provided for service purposes only. The
power supply/charger assembly, Figure 3-5 (P/N 76-100009001) is comprised of a printed circuit board (PCB) mounted on
a AC / DC switching power module. The switching power provides 4 amps of 24 VDC power from the 120 / 240 VAC input
power. The PCB assembly is a microprocessor based unit which
provides the system with
•
Battery charging (up to 33 AH) and supervision Low Voltage Battery cutoff at 19VDC
•
AC power supervision
•
24 VDC supervision
•
Battery load test
•
24 VDC ground fault detection (+/-)
•
Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble
or power off condition (Relay shown in the unpowered state)
•
Auxiliary 24 VDC outputs (programmable for switched or
unswitched configurations)
The power supply/charger assembly provides terminal connections for an auxiliary power module. This module comes with 2
different wiring harnesses, as follows:
•
P/N 76-100009-002 is supplied with a 36" harness that is
meant to connect a main power supply/charger assembly
to the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.
•
P/N 76-100009-003 is supplied with an 8" harness to mount
a main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary power
module in a expansion enclosure.
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main power
supply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 amps of
current and make the total available current of 8 amps for this
assembly. The system can support up to 8 main power supply/
charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliary
power module to each one to provide a maximum available current of 64 amps. Each additional power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-001) would need to have a separate address
to operate in the system. The auxiliary power module would
share the same address as the main power supply/charger assembly that it is connected to. Refer to drawing number 06235443-003, in Appendix I, for further installation details.
The auxiliary 24 VDC outputs rated at 1 Amp each and can be
used to power 4 wire type detection devices such as smoke,
flame and gas detectors which must be sized properly to stay
within output current limits.
Figure 3-5. Obsolete Power Supply/Charger Assembly (Revision A), Details
August 1999
3-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.4
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Rev. C.
•
Battery charging (up to 99 AH) and supervision
•
Low Voltage Battery cutoff at 19VDC
•
AC power supervision
•
24 VDC supervision
•
Battery load test
•
2 auxiliary 24 VDC outputs, programmable for switched or
unswitched configuration
•
Trouble relay that transfers upon any power supply trouble
or power off condition (Relay shown in the unpowered state)
•
The addition of an auxiliary power module to the main power
supply/charger assembly will provide an additional 4 amps of
current and make the total available current of 8 amps for this
assembly. The system can support up to 8 main power supply/
charger assemblies with the capability of adding an auxiliary
power module to each one to provide a maximum available current of 64 amps. Each additional power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) would need to have a separate address
to operate in the system. The auxiliary power module would
share the same address as the main power supply/charger assembly that it is connected to. Refer to drawing number 06235443-003, in Appendix I, for further installation details.
The power supply/charger assembly (P/N 76-100009-010) provides terminal connections for an auxiliary power module. This
module is available with two different wiring harnesses, which
follow:
•
P/N 76-100009-003 is supplied with an 8" harness to mount
a main power supply/charger assembly to an auxiliary power
module in a expansion enclosure.
NOTE: The Rev. C. Power Supply/Charger assembly can be
distinguished from the Rev. A. version by the large heat
sink on the right side of the unit.
P/N 76-100009-002 is supplied with a 36" harness that is
meant to connect a main power supply/charger assembly
to the auxiliary power module in the main cabinet.
CAUTION: THE VOLTAGE FOR THE TWO BATTERIES IN SERIES MUST
BE GREATER THAN 22 VDC BEFORE CONNECTION TO THE PANEL.
TWO (2) SEALED
LEAD-ACID
BATTERIES
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
POWER LIMITED TO 1.5 A DC
Figure 3-6. Power Supply/Charger Assembly (Revision C), Details
76-100016-001
3-5
August 1999
PEGAsys
3-3.5
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard
connection located on the motherboard and the loop number and
addresses assigned to the connected module. Refer to Drawing.
No. 06-235443-012, in Appendix I, for installation details.
The multi-loop I/O motherboard assembly, P/N 76-100017-001,
is an assembly which can accept any combination of 9 modules consisting of up to 8 RX/TX modules and provide connections for up to 7 I/O module circuit board assemblies. The ML
motherboard is mounted to standoffs on the back of the main
system enclosure. It distributes the system 24 VDC power, CCMRX/TX communications modules and I/O bus communications
to the I/O modules. The I/O bus communications are provided
by a RJ-12 (flat phone cable) style connection. A single RJ-12
connection connects the ML motherboard to the CCM for RX/
TX communications. The 24 VDC is provided by the system
power supply via a 2 conductor wiring harness connected to a
terminal block (TB9) is distributed through terminal blocks (TB1TB8) for connection on RX/TXs. The 24 VDC provided by the
system power supply via 2 conductor wiring connected to terminal block TB-11 is distributed through I/O bus slots for powering I/O modules.
Table 3-1. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard Connectors
The RX/TX module communicates to the CCM via the multiplexer
located on the motherboard. The CCM identifies each of the installed RX/TX modules by the RS-232 connection on the
motherboard. The table below lists each RX/TX communication
CONNECTOR
LOOP
ADDRESS
JP1
1
1001-1255
JP2
2
2001-2255
JP3
3
3001-3255
JP4
4
4001-4255
JP5
5
5001-5255
JP6
6
6001-6255
JP7
7
7001-7255
JP8
8
8001-8255
Figure 3-7. Multi-Loop I/O Motherboard, Details
August 1999
3-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.6
Signal Output Module
Power for normal standby and alarm operation derives from either of two sources; 1) primary supply up to its capacity, or 2)
auxiliary power supply input. Provision for hardwire input of auxiliary power has been made through the use of hardwire connections between the auxiliary power supply and terminals 1 &
2 of the terminal block of the signal module. Output circuits are
listed for use in power limited applications.
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Signal Output modules, shown in Figure 3-8, thus providing 32 possible signal circuits. Each Signal Output module is equipped
with supervised 24 VDC outputs which can operate as Style “Y”
or Style “Z” indicating circuits. The module will allow for 4 Style
“Y” or 2 Style “Z” or a mix of 2 Style “Y” and 1 Style “Z”. Each
circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault. The ability
to isolate individual outputs is accessed through the system
operator menu options.
Each circuit can be individually programmed via the PCS program for Continuous, Pulsed 60 or 120 BPM (March-Time) or
Coded (Temporal Pattern) operation. Relation between each
signal output and its input source shall be defined by the panel
EOC logic program. In Walk Test mode the signal output circuit(s)
shall sound the test signal if programmed properly. The walk
test signal will be a 1.0 second pulse, then off until the next
device is activated.
The alarm output circuits are polarity reversing type, rated for
24 VDC signaling devices up to 2.0 Amp maximum per circuit.
Careful consideration of alarm strobe in-rush currents has been
made to help avoid any potential problems with the increased
power requirements in support of the wide range of the ADA /
UL 1971 signaling appliances in the marketplace. Refer to drawing number 06-235443-006 for installation details.
2 STYLE "Z"
10K EOR
{
Reset Switch
Trouble LED
SIGNAL AUD
76-100003-001
NotUsed
10K EOR
10K EOR
Sounder Circuits 1-4
10K EOR
2: Cut Jumpers W9 & W10 when
Auxiliary Power Input is used to
remove module from RS-485
power bus..
3: Only 8 of this Type Module can
be used on the system. Refer
to Section 1-2.7, in Chapter 1,
for other limitations.
4 STYLE "Y"
10K EOR
10K EOR
10K EOR
10K EOR
CIRCUIT 3
1 STYLE "Z" AND 2 STYLE "Y"
TB1
Note 1: Refer to DWG. No. 06-235443-006,
in Appendix I, for Configuration
Jumper (W1-W8).
CIRCUIT 1
See Note 2
{
Auxiliary Power
Module Address
Assignment
5
6
7
+
8
+
9
10
11
+
12
+
10K EOR
5
6
7
+
8
+
9
10
11
+
12
+
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 4
2 STYLE "Y" AND 1 STYLE "Z"
5
6
7
+
8
+
9
10
11
+
12
+
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 2
10K EOR
10K EOR
CIRCUIT 3
CIRCUIT 4
10K EOR
5
6
7
+
8
+
9
10
11
+
12
+
CIRCUIT 1
CIRCUIT 2
CIRCUIT 3
Figure 3-8. Signal Output Module, Details
76-100016-001
3-7
August 1999
PEGAsys
3-3.7
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Relay Output Module
The auxiliary relays are rated for 2.0 Amp @ 30 VDC & 1.0 Amp
@ 120 VAC. Refer to Drawing. No. 06-235371-007, in Appendix I, for further installation details.
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 Auxiliary Relay Output cards for up to 32 relays. Each Auxiliary
Relay Output card (shown in Figure 3-9) is equipped with 4
Form C, dry contact relay outputs. The ability to isolate an individual relay output is accomplished through the system operator menu.
Each relay output can be individually programmed via the PCS
program for operation. Relation between each relay output and
its input source is defined by the panel EOC logic program. In
Walk Test mode the relay output circuit(s) will not operate when
the input device(s) under test are activated.
RELAY
76-100004-001
Note: A maximum of 8 Relay Output Modules can be used on the system. Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
Figure 3-9. Relay Output Module, Details
August 1999
3-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.8
Agent Release Output Module
Table 3-2. Approved Release Output Devices
The PEGAsys panel has the capacity for a maximum of 8 agent
release output modules, which provides up to 8 possible release
circuits and 24 maximum signal outputs on these modules.
Each Agent Release Output card is equipped with a 24V, supervised output which is programmable for solenoid-type discharge controls. The installer must select discharge control type
required during software configuration programming. The circuit shall be supervised for open or ground fault conditions. The
ability for individual release output isolate is provided through
the system operator menu.
Each card is equipped with supervised signaling outputs for 3
Style “Y” 24 VDC polarity reversing type indicating circuits. Each
signal circuit is supervised for open, short and ground fault conditions. The ability for individual output isolation is provided
through the system operator menu. Careful consideration of
alarm strobe in-rush currents has been made.
M anufacturer
Solenoids
Kidde-Fenwal
486500 &
48650001
Kidde-Fenwal
890181
Kidde-Fenwal
897494
Kidde-Fenwal
899175
Kidde-Fenwal
895630
Various Manufacturers
FM Groups A, B, D, E, &
G
Sprinkler Solenoids
Power for standby and alarm operation of release and signaling
outputs shall derive from one of two sources; 1) primary supply up
to its capacity, or 2) auxiliary power supply input. Input of auxiliary
power is hardwired through terminals 1 & 2 on the modules terminal block. Output circuits are Listed for use in Power Limited applications. All signaling power is fully regulated.
The agent release output circuit is rated for 24 VDC control
devices. Each release output can supervise and activate up to
two (2) solenoid control heads.
Table 3-2 details all devices with which the agent release module is approved for operation.
Module Address
Assignment
Reset Switch
Trouble LED
RELEASE
76-100001-001
Auxiliary Power
See Note 2
}
1
Release Circuits
TB1
Signal Circuits
12
Note 1: Only a maximum of 8 of this type module can be used on the system.
Refer to paragraph 1-2.7, in Chapter 1, for other limitations.
2: W1 and W2 must be cut when the auxiliary power input is used.
Figure 3-10. Agent Release Output Module, Details
76-100016-001
3-9
August 1999
PEGAsys
3-3.9
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
City-Tie Module
Reverse Polarity-Type Output: Unsupervised output for trip
circuit wiring only, current limited at 100 mA, 24 VDC.
The City Notification Card (Figure 3-11) provides connection and
operation for Local Energy, Shunt type Master Box and Reverse
Polarity styles of output. The output type is selected by choosing
which terminals terminate the field wiring. The module has an Amber LED to signify disconnect status. The ability for individual output isolate is provided through the system operator menu.
Reverse Polarity output circuits are listed for use in Power Limited applications. Refer to Drawing. No. 06-235443-008 for further installation details.
The City Tie Module will operate during PEGAsys' “FailSoft”
mode. Any system alarm will cause the output to transfer.
Local Energy-Type Output: Monitored output for trip circuit wiring and Master Box coil status (Set/Unset), current limited at
550 mA, 24 VDC. Monitored for open, short and ground fault.
In Walk Test mode the city notification outputs shall be disabled.
In addition, the output has provisions for manual disable or isolate through the operator menu function. The initiation of a walk
test will institute a system trouble causing the city tie output to
transfer to the trouble state.
Shunt-Type Output: Unsupervised contact rated at 5.0 Amp,
24 VDC resistive.
CITY TIE
76-100002-001
Note: Only 1 City Tie Module can be connected to the system.
Figure 3-11. City Tie Module, Details
August 1999
3-10
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
3-3.10 Field Devices
SmartOne photoelectric detectors have an unobtrusive low profile look and are available using the following:
The SmartOne Series of Intelligent Fire Alarm devices provide
the PEGAsys control system with smoke & heat detection, necessary monitoring and control functions required by today’s advanced Fire Alarm systems. Each of the SmartOne devices
features an intrinsic microprocessor with 4K of nonvolatile
memory. Each device constantly monitors its surrounding environment and makes decisions in response to that information
then reports status as required to the control panel. Each loop
device communicates with the RX/TX module over the PC
(power/communications) line.
•
This “Distributed Intelligence” architecture allows each loop device to make decisions within the monitored area. This unique
utilization of processing power makes possible a system of loop
devices with greater capacity and flexibility than any typical addressable device system with centralized processing.
Figure 3-12. Typical Detector
3-3.13 SmartOne Heat Detectors
The SmartOne heat detectors provide true distributed intelligence addressable microprocessor based heat detection to the
PEGAsys system. Model THD-7252 is a analog fixed temperature thermistor type detector which does not respond to rate of
rise conditions until its programmed set point is met. Unique
algorithms are used to compensate for heat rise without problems associated with false alarms due to elevated rates of rise
in ambient temperature.
Each SmartOne device contains a status LED which blinks in
various patterns to indicate device status. The blink rates and
associated status levels are as follows:
Blink Rate
Operation status
9 Second Rate
Normal mode
2 Second Rate
Alarm (activated)
A unique sensing chamber permits 360° heat entry and response. Each detector is electronically addressable and can
be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm
& alarm sensitivity set points and drift compensation algorithm
are stored in each detector's nonvolatile memory.
Off (not blinking) Trouble condition
The following three paragraphs describe each type of available
detector. A typical detector is shown in Figure 3-12.
3-3.11 SmartOne Ionization Detectors
SmartOne Heat detectors have an unobtrusive low-profile look
and are available using the following:
The SmartOne Ionization smoke detectors provide true distributed intelligence addressable microprocessor based smoke detection to the PEGAsys system. Model CPD-7052 is a dual
chamber analog ionization type detector which senses both visible and invisible smoke. A unique sensing chamber permits
360° smoke entry and response. Each detector is electronically
addressable and can be fully field programmed. Calibration, device address, pre-alarm & alarm sensitivity set points and drift
compensation algorithm are stored in each detectors non volatile memory.
•
The PEGASYS Contact Monitor (P/N 70-407008-00X) allows
an installer the ability to interface typical NO/NC fire alarm devices, such as water flow and tamper switches to the PEGAsys
system. The contact monitor is also used to interface to the
Manual Alarm, Manual Release and Abort Stations. The addressable contact monitor device is programmable to report in
the following manners: Alarm (default), Trouble, Manual Alarm,
Waterflow Alarm, Manual Release, Abort, Supervisory and Normal (Silent input). Its default setting is alarm when programmed
using the Autolearn function.
Model CPD 7052 SmartOne Ionization Detector:
P/N 70-402001-100
3-3.12 SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors
The unit includes a connection for an optional status LED which
allows the device to indicate its present operating status. In normal standby mode the LED will flash every 9 seconds, in trouble
condition the LED will be extinguished, when activated the LED
will flash every 2 seconds.
The SmartOne Photoelectric smoke detectors provide true distributed intelligence addressable microprocessor based smoke
detection to the PEGAsys system. Model PSD-7152 is a analog photoelectric type detector which responds to a broad range
of smoldering and flaming type fires. A unique sensing chamber permits 360° smoke entry and response. Each detector is
electronically addressable and can be fully field programmed.
Calibration, device address, pre-alarm & alarm sensitivity set
points and drift compensation algorithm are stored in each
detector's nonvolatile memory.
76-100016-001
Model THD 7252 SmartOne Heat Detector:
P/N 70-404001-100
3-3.14 Addressable Contact Input Devices
SmartOne Ionization detectors have an unobtrusive low profile
look and are available using the following:
•
Model PSD 7152 SmartOne Photoelectric Detector:
P/N 71-402001-100
3-11
•
Addressable Contact Input Device (NO):
P/N 70-407008-001.
•
Addressable Contact Input Device (NC):
P/N 70-407008-002.
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
The duct housing accepts either the PSD-7152 or CPD-7052
smoke detectors. A transparent Lexan cover over the detection
chamber allows visual inspection of the duct detector chamber
and the internal smoke detector status. Sampling of the air in
the duct is accomplished through the use of sampling tubes
which extend into the HVAC duct.
Ω
•
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing:
P/N 70-403001-100
•
Model DH-2000 CPDI Air Duct Housing with Ion Det.:
P/N 70-403001-052
•
Model DH-2000 PSDI Air Duct Housing with Photo Det.:
P/N 70-403001-152
Refer to DH-2000 Installation manual 74-222 (P/N 06-235398001) for further details.
Ω
Figure 3-13. Addressable Contact Input Device
3-3.15 Addressable Relay Output Devices
The addressable relay output device (P/N 70-408004-001) provides the PEGAsys system with a Form “C” dry contact interface for remote control applications. The device connects directly
to the RX/TX multiplex loop and contains an SPDT relay for
control of auxiliary equipment. The device can be activated
through the systems EOC or RTC programming and its default
operation programming is done during the Autolearn function.
The unit includes an intrinsic status LED which allows the device to indicate its present operating status. In normal standby
mode the LED will flash every 9 seconds, in trouble condition
the LED will be extinguished, in activated condition the LED will
flash every 2 seconds.
•
Figure 3-15. DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
3-3.17 Loop Isolator Devices
Addressable Relay Output Device:
P/N 70-408004-001
Form-C contact rated at:
0.6 A @ 120 VAC
2.0 A @ 30 VDC (resistive)
1.0 A @ 30 VDC (inductive)
N/C
7
Field
Connections
6
5
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
The loop isolators are offered in three package styles, one stand
alone style in a single gang electrical box arrangement, a second in a detector base module arrangement which allows the
unit to be mounted behind a smoke detector in the 6” detector
base and a third which mounts directly on the RX/TX module.
1
2
3
4
6
7
MODEL AO
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001
SEE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235577-001
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
5
N/C COM N/O
SmartOne TM
PC Line
Out
PC PC PC PC
(+) (-) (+) (-)
PC Line
In
N/O
COM
The SmartOne series of loop devices offer optional loop isolation which protects the loop from wire-to-wire short conditions
(NFPA 72 Style 7). The isolators will open the loop between two
isolators in the presence of a short circuit condition, thus allowing the remainder of the loop to operate normally, however, a
trouble indication for the devices effected by the isolation will
be prompted on the panel. The isolators will return to normal
operation when the short condition has been removed from the
effected wires.
The single gang mount unit includes intrinsic status LED’s which
allows the device to indicate in which direction the short condition is being detected. In normal standby mode the LED will be
extinguished, in activated condition the LED will be on continuously.
Figure 3-14. Addressable Relay Output Device
3-3.16 Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing
The DH-2000 air duct housing is designed for detecting particles of combustion in air handling systems. Upon smoke detection the system can be programmed to control a variety of
devices like HVAC fans and power shut down preventing unnecessary damage to the facility.
August 1999
3-12
•
Loop Isolator RX/TX mount:
P/N 74-200012-001
•
Loop Isolator Stand-alone (Single Gang):
P/N 74-200012-002
•
Loop Isolator 6” detector base mount:
P/N 74-200012-004
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Figure 3-18. Loop Isolator, 6" Detector Base Mount
Figure 3-16. Loop Isolator, RX/TX Mount
Figure 3-17. Loop Isolator, Stand-Alone
76-100016-001
3-13
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
3-14
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 4
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE
4-1
is operating as intended. The test actually stimulates the detection chamber of the device and verifies the response from the
device. The CCM will report a result of the test for each device
tested.
INTRODUCTION.
This chapter contains maintenance instructions for the PEGAsys.
These procedures should be accomplished on a scheduled basis. In the event that system problems are found during the performance of a procedure, refer to Chapter 5 for corrective action.
NOTE: This test has a pass or fail result. It will not activate
alarm outputs on the system.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the loop device test follows:
4-2
NOTE: Addressable Contact Input Modules cannot be tested
with this procedure. This is for SmartOne smoke and
heat detectors only.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE.
The scheduled maintenance of the system should be performed
at an established interval. The interval that the maintenance
procedures are performed should not exceed any imposed regulations (NFPA 72 or local codes).
a.
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
4-3
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES.
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
The following paragraphs outline general scheduled maintenance procedures to be performed on an as-necessary basis.
4-3.1
b.
Lamp Test
c.
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
d.
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
Enter the device address to be tested and then press the
return push-button.
e.
Verify the display scrolls through each selected address
and read as below:
2:LIST
4:TEST
START DEVICE TEST
TESTING (Device Address #)
Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
f.
1:LAMP TEST
2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
c.
d.
Press number 2 push-button, verify that the display reads:
START DEVICE TEST
TEST DEVICES FROM _ _ _ _TO_ _ _ _
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
b.
Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:LAMP TEST
2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
This test allows the user to check the system display LEDs.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the lamp test follows:
a.
2:LIST
4:TEST
When the device testing is completed the display will read:
TEST COMPLETED
(Address #) TEST (PASSED or FAILED)
Press number 1 push-button, verify that the display reads:
***LAMP TEST***
***VERSION 1.0***
g.
Ensure the following LEDs are momentarily lit:
4-3.3
POWER ON
TROUBLE
GROUND FAULT
CPU ERROR
This test allows the user to activate a battery test to verify battery capacity. The step-by-step procedure to perform the battery test follows:
4-3.2
ALARM
SUPERVISORY
PREALARM
SILENCE
a.
Loop Device Test
Battery Test
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
The PEGAsys system provides a unique detector test function
which allows a user to initiate a test of a detection device through
the use of the system menus and verify the detection device(s)
76-100016-001
Press the SCROLL push-button to read the status of each
device tested.
(2) Type in the Level 1 or Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
4-1
2:LIST
4:TEST
August 1999
PEGAsys
b.
c.
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
Heat Detectors:
1:LAMP TEST
2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
When testing SmartOne heat detectors use of a low powered
heat gun is acceptable. Heat the detector for a minimum of ten
seconds. When a sufficient amount of heat has been detected
by the detector, the control panel will respond with an alarm
indication. The status LED of the detector will flash at a 2 second rate during the alarm period. Take care during the heating
of the detector to avoid over heating the plastic housing. Maintain a minimum of 1 foot between the detector and the heat gun
nozzle. Use of open flame devices are not recommended as
discoloration of the plastic housing is likely and this is a potentially hazardous practice.
Press number 3 push-button, verify that the display reads:
BATTERY TEST
BATTERY TEST ON PS*_ _
d.
Enter the power supply address which the batteries are
connected to. Verify the display reads:
BATTERY TEST
TEST ACTIVATED ON PS(_ _)
e.
Upon the completion of the test the display will read:
4-3.4.2 WALK TEST PROCEDURE
TEST ON PS(_ _) COMPLETED
>_>_ _._V
f.
The step-by-step procedure to perform the walk test follows:
a.
Verify that the voltage is within allowable tolerances.
4-3.4
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
Walk Test
(2) Type in the Level-2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
The PEGAsys system provides a one person walk test function. This allows the service person to enable a group of devices for walk test, then proceed through the installation
activating the specified devices. The system will respond to each
activation with a short burst of the programmed signal circuit.
The related signal circuit will only be pulsed if it has been configured for the Walk Test feature when defining it in the PCS
software.
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
b.
2:LIST
4:TEST
Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:LAMP TEST
2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
During the system installation/configuration operation the installer would need to enable each signal circuit installed in the
system for “Walk Test”, if desired. The systems signal outputs
default to walk test disabled. When walk test is activated and
carried out the system enters each activation with a time and
date stamp. The operator can then print out all walk test results
for review.
c.
Press the SCROLL push-button, verify that the display
reads:
4:WALK TEST
d.
5:ALARM SIM TEST
Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:START WALK TEST
e.
The walk test feature can be deactivated two ways, the service
person can deactivate it through the user menus or the walk
test function will time out after 10 minutes of non activation ensuring system response if the service person is called away for
an extended period of time.
5:STOP WALK TEST
Press number 1 push-button, verify that the display reads:
START DEVICE WALK TEST
WALK TEST STARTED ON LOOP( _ _)
f.
NOTE: When the walk test is active the panel will annunciate
a trouble condition.
After completion of the walk test, press number 2 pushbutton to disable the walk test mode.
4-3.5
Alarm Simulation Test (AST)
The PEGAsys system provides a feature which allows the system installer/inspector to verify the actual output operation in
relation to the input(s) which are programmed to activate the
output of interest. The service person would enable the AST
function for a particular input and the system would operate the
output(s) as it is programmed in the Event Output Control program. The system will respond with an alarm condition when
the AST feature is enabled. The user would have to disable the
AST when output operation has been verified.
4-3.4.1 WALK TESTING DETECTORS
Place the system in walk test as described in Paragraph 4-3.4.2.
To place a detector into alarm perform the applicable procedure below:
Smoke Detectors:
When testing SmartOne smoke detectors use a "punk-stick" or
"cotton wick" to generate smoke. Apply smoke to the detector
for a minimum of 10 seconds. When a sufficient amount of
smoke has entered the device, the control panel will respond
with an alarm indication. The status LED of the detector will
flash at a 2 second rate during the alarm period. Use of aerosol
smoke simulation product may be used if acceptable to the
Authority having Jurisdiction and if the product is used as directed in the instructions.
August 1999
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
WARNING
Any outputs which are controlling critical processes or agent releasing should be physically disconnected from the process or agent container to
avoid unwanted shutdowns and/or agent releases.
When the AST function is enabled the pre- programmed outputs for the activated input(s) will
activate.
4-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
4-3.5.1 AST PROCEDURE
4.
"Testing shall include verification that the releasing circuits
and components energized or actuated by the fire alarm
system are electrically supervised and operate as intended
on alarm."
5.
"Suppression systems and releasing components shall be
returned to their normal condition upon completion of system testing."
The step-by-step procedure to perform the AST follows:
a.
Be sure to observe the above warning.
b.
Access the PEGAsys system menus by:
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level-2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
c.
4-4.1
Perform the following step-by-step procedure prior to system
testing.
2:LIST
4:TEST
a.
Press number 4 push-button, verify that the display reads:
1:LAMP TEST
2:LOOP DEVICES
3:BATTERY TEST SCROLL for more
d.
e.
Use safety precautions when removing solenoids
and connections from initiators (i.e. use the shorting cap when the initiators are disconnected) to
prevent unwanted discharge or activation.
5:ALARM SIM TEST
b.
Press number 5 push-button, verify that the display reads:
The suppression system is now fully disarmed from
all automatic activation and, in some cases, all
manual activation.
Type in the selected device address and then press the
return push-button. Verify that the display reads:
c.
ALARM SIMULATION TEST
1:ACTIVATE
2:DE-ACTIVATE
g.
Press number 1 push-button and then the return push-button. Verify that the system responds as programed.
h.
Press the ACKLDGE push-button to acknowledge the
alarm.
i.
De-activate the AST programming by:
(1) Repeat steps b. through f.
(2) Press number 2 push-button and then return (↵).
4-4
IMPORTANT NOTES
"Testing personnel shall be familiar with the specific arrangement and operation of the suppression system(s) and releasing function(s) and cognizant of the hazards associated
with inadvertent system discharge."
"Occupant notification shall be required whenever a fire
alarm system configured for releasing service is being serviced or tested."
3.
"Discharge testing of suppression systems shall not be required by this code. Suppression systems shall be secured
from inadvertent actuation, including disconnection of releasing solenoids/electric actuators, closing of valves, other
actions, or combinations thereof, as appropriate for the
specific system, for the duration of the fire system testing."
76-100016-001
Arming Release Circuits
Perform the following step-by-step procedure upon completion
of system testing.
DISARMING AND REARMING RELEASE
CIRCUITS
2.
The system can now be tested without the risk of an inadvertent release of agent.
4-4.2
The disarming and rearming procedures which follow must be
performed when testing the PEGAsys system. Prior to preceding ensure the notes below from NFPA 72 Chapter 7 are understood.
1.
Physically remove the solenoids at the storage containers.
WARNING
ALARM SIMULATION TEST
DETECTOR ADDRESS _ _ _ _
f.
Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu
(Refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
WARNING
Press the SCROLL push-button, verify that the display
reads:
4:WALK TEST
Disarming Release Circuits
a.
Verify that all solenoids are disconnected from storage containers.
b.
Isolate all agent release circuits using the system menu
(Refer to Paragraph 2-5.4.1).
c.
Reconnect the solenoids at the storage containers.
d.
Ensure the system is free of any alarms to prevent unwanted
discharge or activation.
e.
De-isolate agent release circuit(s).
f.
The system is now in full operation in accordance with system programming.
4-5
POWERING DOWN THE SYSTEM
4-5.1
Power-Down Procedure
The step-by-step procedure to power-down the system follows:
a.
Ensure that the panel does not have any active alarms to
prevent unwanted discharge or activation.
CAUTION
If alarms do exist during power-down, power-up of
the panel will cause a reactivation of the alarm sequence and possible activation of the suppression
system.
b.
4-3
Disarm release circuits as per Paragraph 4-4.1.
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
c.
Remove DC power by disconnecting batteries first.
d.
Remove AC power by shutting off the circuit breaker to the
panel, second.
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
1:AM
2:PM
(d) Type in appropriate selection (1 for AM or 2 for
PM).
c.
4-6
POWERING UP THE SYSTEM
4-6.1
Power-Up Procedure
a.
Ensure that all solenoids are disconnected from the storage containers to prevent unwanted discharge or activation.
b.
If the system has been powered down energize the system
by performing the following steps:
(1) Set the circuit breaker for the CCP power to ON. Verify
that the display reads "Main Processor Power On" and
that the CPU ERROR indicator is lit. Ensure that the
audible device is buzzing continuously.
(2) Press the display module reset switch. Verify that the
CPU ERROR indicator is extinguished and the audible
device is silenced.
(3) Verify that the display reads as follows:
Rearm release circuit per Paragraph 4-4.2.
MAIN PROCESSOR
POWER ON
(4) After ten seconds, verify that the display reads as follows:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE ON
RXTX1
NOTE: The RX/TX message will repeat itself for each RX/TX
module in the system while the system initializes itself.
This initialization can take up to 90 seconds.
(5) Verify that the POWER ON and TROUBLE indicators
are lit.
(6) Connect the backup batteries to the CCP in accordance
to the procedure in Chapter 7.
(7) Press the ACKLDGE push-button. After approximately
one minute the display will momentarily read:
RXTX NON-MONITORING TROUBLE OFF
(8) Verify the display reads the correct time and date. If
the incorrect time is displayed perform step a.9.
(9) Set time and date as follows:
(a) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(b) Type in the default 1st level password (987).
(c) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
2:LIST
4:TEST
(d) Type in 3111 on the keypad. Verify that the display reads:
SYSTEM TIME (AM/PM)
ENTER THE TIME _ _ : _ _ (HH:MM)
(e) Type in the time (HH=hours 0-12 and then
MM=minutes 0-59). Press the return key. Verify
that the display reads:
August 1999
4-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 5
TROUBLESHOOTING AND CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5-1
INTRODUCTION
5-3
The effectiveness of this chapter is greatly increased by first
reading the entire manual. The service technician must have a
sure understanding of the purpose and correct function of the
module/device before attempting corrective maintenance. This
chapter contains instructions to aid a technician in locating faulty
modules/devices.
TROUBLESHOOTING
The PEGAsys system utilizes internal programming for continuous system testing. Most system faults can be isolated
through the operation of the front panel. Users/technicians
can initiate various testing via the use of the system menu
(See Paragraph 2-5) after entering a valid password.
Table 5-1. Troubleshooting Index
This chapter also provides instructions for the removal and replacement of the replaceable modules/devices of the PEGAsys
system.
Detailed
Illustration
Functional
Description
Paragraph
Replacement
Procedure
Central Control
Module
3-3
3-3.1
5-4.2
Receiver/Transmitter Module RXTX
3-4
3-3.2
5-4.3
Power Supply
Module
3-5 & 3-6
3-3.3 & 3-3.4
7-7.6, 7-7.7 &
7-7.8
Multi-Loop
Motherboard
3-7
3-3.5
Basic I/O
Motherboard
1-6
1-2.5
7-5
Signal Output
Module
3-8
3-3.6
7-7.1
Relay Output
Module
3-9
3-3.7
7-7.2
Agent Release
Module
3-10
3-3.8
7-7.3
City Tie Module
3-11
3-3.9
7-7.4
Field Device
--
3-3.8
5-4.4
Addressable
Contact Input
Device
3-11
3-3.12
5-4.4
Addessable Relay
Output Device
3-12
3-3.13
5-5.4
Air Duct Housing
3-13
3-3.14
See Manual
Loop Isolators
3-14 thru 316
3-3.15
Module/Device
WARNING
All service to panel must be done with panel powered down to prevent damage to panel components, personnel injury, or both
5-2
STANDARD FAULT-ISOLATION TECHNIQUES
Failure of the PEGAsys system to function properly will usually
be caused by one or more of the following faults:
a.
Failure of the Power Supply
b.
Burned Out Indicator
c.
Damaged Wiring or Corrosion
e.
Component Failure
When a failure occurs and the cause is not known, check as
many of these items as is practical before starting a detailed
check. If possible, obtain information about any changes taking
place that may affect the system.
5-2.1
Visual Inspection
When troubleshooting, the fault may often be discovered through
visual inspection alone. Some faults, such as burned out indicators, shorted transformers, or wiring, can be located by sight
or smell. Check for smoke or the odor of burned or overheated
parts. Look for loose connections. Visual inspection is also useful in avoiding damage to the system which could occur through
improper servicing methods. Refer to Table 5-1, Troubleshooting Index, and the paragraphs of this chapter for troubleshooting beyond visual inspection.
5-2.2
Power Checks
Many faults on the system can be caused by problems with
power. Ensure battery and line voltages are checked prior to
troubleshooting the system.
76-100016-001
5-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
5-4
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT
a.
Disconnect plug from terminal T1.
The following paragraphs provide required tools and step-by-step
replacement procedures for the PEGAsys. The procedures
should also be used to assist module and device installation.
b.
Remove the two mounting screws from the module and move
module to gain access to connected wiring.
c.
Remove the plug from the RS-232 port.
CAUTION
d.
Remove power plug from connector jack J1.
e.
Remove new RX/TX module from packing and inspect for
physical damage.
Some components are subject to damage from
electrostatic discharge (ESD). These components
are not to be removed from their protective wrappings until they are to be installed in their respective equipment locations, and then only by
personnel connected to earth ground.
5-4.1
f.
Ensure jumper configuration is set.
g.
Install new RX/TX in the reverse order of removal.
Required Tools
The following tools will be required to perform the removal and
replacement procedures.
a.
Small Flat-Blade Screwdriver
b.
6" Flat-Blade Screwdriver
c.
No. 2 Philips Screwdriver
d.
Wire Striper
e.
Small Needle Nose Pliers
f.
Ground strap
5-4.2
Central Control Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure for
replacing the CCM.
a.
Ensure all programming is saved using PCS software.
b.
Disconnect plugs from the I/O Port and RX/TX port, and PC
port (if connected to IIM)
c.
Remove the wiring from TB6.
d.
Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM in
place.
e.
Remove CCM from cabinet.
f.
Remove new CCM from packing and inspect for physical
damage.
g.
Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal.
5-4.3
Figure 5-1. Installation for Single Loop
RX/TX Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
for replacing the RX/TX module. Depending on the system configuration refer to the appropriate Figure, 5-1 or 5-2.
Ensure that the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the procedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX
Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed.
The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6
wiring style. Refer to drawing 06-235443-002, in Appendix I, the
installation drawing which shows the jumper locations on the
RX/TX module. The settings are used to set the wiring style ( 4, 6
or 7), with 7 being used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TX
Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a single digit) call-outs on
the module board. Table 5-2 lists the types of allowable configurations you can select along with their respective jumpers.
August 1999
Figure 5-2. Installation for Multi-Loop
5-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 5-2. RX/TX Configuration Selection
Jumper
Style 4
Style 6
Style 6
W/Loop
Isolator
Style 7
W1 & W2
Open
Shorted
Shorted
Shorted
JP 2
Shorted
Shorted
Open
Open
JP 3
Shorted
Shorted
Open
Open
NOTE: Style-7 requires the use of loop isolators, the RX/TX
module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74-200012001 isolator module to operate in the Style-7
configuration.
5-4.4
Field Devices
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to replace field devices into the PEGAsys system.
NOTE: Smoke and heat detectors can be replaced without
powering down the system. If adding new loop devices
to the system, then the panel will need to be powered
down.
NOTE: If device is in alarm, the alarm must be cleared prior to
removal from the system. If the alarm cannot be cleared,
remove the device from the system and push the hard
reset on the CCM motherboard and RX/TX. Once the
system is on-line insert the replacement device onto
the loop.
a.
Identify the defective device to be replaced.
b.
Remove the defective device from the PC Line.
c.
Record the Model Number and Device Type.
d.
Ensure the new device is an exact replacement. Verify that
the Model Number is the same as the defective device.
e.
Set the address of the new device to the same as the defective device using the procedure in Paragraph 2-8.6.
f.
Connect the new device to the PC Line where the defective device was removed, if not accomplished in the previous step. Use the same detector base or electrical box of
the defective device.
g.
Perform the appropriate test listed below:
•
Loop Device Test (Paragraph 4-3.2) for Detection Devices.
•
Walk Test (Paragraph 4-3.4.2) for AI or AO.
76-100016-001
5-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
5-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 6
PARTS LIST
6-1
INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys system parts list, Table 6-1 provides a list of all
repair parts.
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List
NOMENCLATURE
PART NUMBER
SYSTEMS
PEGAsys Control Unit (includes CCM with One RX/TX Module, One Power Supply/
Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
76-100000-501
PEGAsys Multi-Loop Control Unit (includes CCM with One Multi-Loop
Motherboard One RX/TX Module, One P.S./Charger Assembly and Enclosure)
76-100000-600
MAIN SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Central Control Module (CCM), Single-loop
76-100008-501
Central Control Module (CCM), Multi-loop
76-100008-600
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, includes 4 Amp. P.S., Rev. C.
76-100009-010
RX/TX Module for Single Loop System
76-100005-001
RX/TX Module for Multi-Loop System
76-100005-002
Main Enclosure
76-100000-502
INPUT/OUTPUT MODULES
Agent Release Module
76-100001-001
Signal Output Module
76-100003-001
Relay Output Module
76-100004-001
City Tie Module
76-100002-001
I/O Motherboard for 8 Option Modules
76-100007-001
I/O Multi-Loop Motherboard for up to 8 RX/TX or 7 I/O modules
76-100017-001
POWER SUPPLIES
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 36" Wiring Harness (for main cabinet)
76-100009-002
Power Supply Module, 4 Amp., including 8" Wiring Harness (for expansion cabinet)
76-100009-003
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS
PEGAsys Expansion Enclosure (order backplane separately)
76-100000-505
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting Motherboard and 4 Power Supplies
76-100000-006
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting 8 Power Supplies
76-100000-007
Expansion Backplane, for Mounting two I/O Motherboards
76-100000-008
Battery Enclosure for Additional Batteries
76-100010-001
Battery 12V, 17AH
06-115915-046
Battery 12V, 33AH
89-100052-001
76-100016-001
6-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table 6-1. PEGAsys System Parts List (Continued)
NOMENCLATURE
PART NUMBER
SMARTONE FIELD DEVICES
Intelligent Photoelectric Detector, Model PSD-7152
71-402001-100
Intelligent Ionization Detector, Model CPD-7052
70-402001-100
Intelligent Thermal Detector, Model THD-7252
70-404001-100
6' Universal Detector Base, Model 6SB
70-400001-100
4' Universal Detector Base, Model 4SB
70-400001-101
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.O.)
70-407008-001
Addressable Contact Input Device (N.C.)
70-407008-002
Addressable Relay Output Device
70-408004-001
Loop Isolator - 1 Gang Box Mounted
74-200012-002
Loop Isolator - Detector Base Mounted
74-200012-004
Loop Isolator - RXTX Mounted
74-200012-001
DUCT HOUSING AND COMPONENTS
DH-2000 Duct Housing without Detector Installed
70-403001-100
DH-2000 PSDI - Duct Housing with Photoelectric Detector Installed
70-403001-152
DH-2000 CPDI - Duct Housing with Ionization Detector Installed
70-403001-052
Sampling Tube - 12", The number of sampling holes vary with tube length. Order
sampling tubes that approximate duct width.
06-129500-001
Sampling Tube - 24"
06-129500-002
Sampling Tube - 48"
06-129500-003
Sampling Tube - 72"
06-129500-004
Sampling Tube - 96"
06-129500-005
Sampling Tube - 120"
06-129500-006
Exhaust Tube Kit
06-129554-001
MISCELLANEOUS
Handheld Device Programmer
74-200013-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and
Terminals
74-100016-001
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems
74-100016-002
6-Conductor Telephone Cable with DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computers
74-100016-003
DB25 Adapter (DTE) for Computers and Terminals (use with 6-Conductor
Telephone Cable)
06-129341-001
DB25 Adapter (DCE) for Modems (use with 6-Conductor Telephone Cable)
06-129317-003
DB9 Adapter (DTE) for Laptop Computer
06-129373-001
August 1999
6-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CHAPTER 7
INSTALLATION
7-1
INTRODUCTION
This chapter provides information necessary to install the PEGAsys system. Installation consists of installing a complete system. The procedures in this chapter should be accomplished
by technicians familiar with fire alarm system installation and
the requirements of relevant NFPA regulations.
7-2
MATERIALS REQUIRED FOR INSTALLATION
The materials listed below are not supplied with the system, but
are required for installation.
•
No. 10 or 1/4 inch Mounting Hardware
•
Electrical Conduit for AC Input Power
•
4-inch Electrical Junction Boxes (as required)
•
Wire-Nuts and Crimp-On Terminals (as required)
•
Ground Strap (for use when handling printed circuit boards
7-3
Figure 7-1. CCP Installation Drawing
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR CENTRAL
CONTROL PANEL
With the enclosure held by the top two screws place the bottom
two mounting screws in place. Tighten the screws. Reinstall the
enclosure door at this time. Care must be taken when installing
the door to ensure that the hinge pins are lined up correctly.
The PEGAsys Central Control Panel enclosure is 28 inches high
x 18 inches wide x 5½ inches deep. It is designed to be surface
or semi-flush mounted using No. 10 or ¼ inch hardware. The
type of hardware to be used is at the discretion of the installer
but must be in accordance with good electrical and safety practices.
7-4
Figure 7-1 shows the enclosure’s mounting hole layout. The
lower set of mounting holes should typically be 44 inches from
the floor in order that the display panel is at a convenient viewing height.
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR
EXPANSION ENCLOSURES
The expansion enclosure (P/N 76-100000-505) uses a back
plate installed in the enclosure to meet various system component requirements. The expansion enclosure maintains the
same outside dimensions as the main system enclosure. There
are three versions of the backplate:
To facilitate mounting the enclosure to its wall position, remove
the enclosure’s front door. Be sure to disconnect the ground
wire before removing the door.
To remove the front door, open the door approximately 90º from
its closed position and lift it up enough to allow the door’s hinge
pins to clear their mating hinge sockets located on the left side
of the Central Control Panel.
Place the mounting screws in to the top two holes in the wall.
Leave approximately 1/4” of both screws exposed. Carefully
place the two key holes over the screws in the wall. Ensure the
enclosure has its door hinge sockets located to the left as you
face the enclosure. Allow the enclosure to gently come to rest
on the screws. Tighten the screws.
•
An I/O module cardcage with mounting provisions for up to
4 power supplies
•
Mounting provisions for up to eight power supplies
•
Two motherboard cardcages for mounting up to 16 I/O modules in the expansion enclosure.
The optional I/O motherboard and I/O modules must be installed
prior to the system being powered up. The I/O bus (communications) and 24 VDC power are attached to connectors located
on the I/O Motherboard.
NOTE: The I/O Bus (RS-485) wiring must be enclosed in
raceway from the main enclosure for a maximum run
of 20 feet, with expansion enclosures located in the
same room as the main enclosure.
Figure 7-2, shows the expansion backplate which provides
mounting for 4 power supplies and one I/O motherboard. Fig-
76-100016-001
7-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
ure 7-3 shows the expansion backplate which provides mounting for up to 8 auxiliary power supplies. Figure 7-4, shows the
expansion backplate which provides mounting for two I/O motherboards.
To install, position the back plate in the enclosure and fasten it
to the seven studs located in the enclosure using the nuts supplied with the enclosure.
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
06-129562-001
MOTHER BD CCM
L
N
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S1
2
1
DS1
N
W4
S2
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
24V
F1
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
06-129562-001
MOTHER BD CCM
SHR
TB9
RET
+
-
24V
RET
24V
RET
RET
24V
TP4
BAT
RET
TB8
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
L
N
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S1
2
1
DS1
N
W4
S2
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
24V
F1
SHR
TB9
RET
+
-
24V
RET
24V
RET
RET
24V
TP4
BAT
RET
TB8
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
DC IN 2
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
Figure 7-4. Back Plate, 2 I/O Motherboard
7-5
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
Figure 7-2. Back Plate, I/O Motherboard & 4 P.S.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a I/O motherboard into a single loop configured system.
TBL RELAY
C
NC
NO
W2 W3
A
B
L
N
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
S1
2
1
DS1
N
W4
06-129562-001
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR I/O
MOTHERBOARD
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
a.
Place motherboard on standoffs in the back of the enclosure.
b.
Insert and tighten the 12 mounting screws provided with
the motherboard.
c.
Connect the 24VDC wiring from the power supply to terminal TB1.
d.
Connect the RJ-12 phone style wire from the MOTHER BD
connector (on the power supply) to J9 on the motherboard.
7-6
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR RX/TX
MODULE (MULTI-LOOP ONLY)
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
TB8
W1
24V
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
NO
W2 W3
A
B
06-129562-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TB9
SHR
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
RET
F1
BAT
SYSTEM POWER
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
RET
+
-
RET
24V
24V
24V
RET
RET
TP3
L
N
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
S1
DS1
N
W4
2
1
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
TB8
W1
TB9
24V
SHR
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
NO
W2 W3
A
B
L
N
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
S1
2
1
DS1
N
W4
06-129562-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET
F1
BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
RET
+
-
RET
24V
24V
24V
RET
RET
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
TB9
24V
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
NO
W2 W3
A
B
L
N
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
S1
2
1
DS1
N
W4
06-129562-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TB8
SHR
F1
RET
+
-
RET
24V
24V
24V
RET
RET
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
BAT
RET
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
24V
F1
SHR
TP4
RET
BAT
RET
RET
24V
24V
24V
RET
TP3
+
-
RET
SYSTEM POWER
DC IN 2
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
for replacing the RX/TX module. Refer to Figure 7-5.
= Back Plate Mounting Studs (7 Locations)
Ensure the RX/TX jumpers are set properly during the procedure. Verify that the settings of the jumpers on the RX/TX Module conform to the wiring style of the system being installed.
The RX/TX is shipped from the factory programmed for Style 6
wiring style. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-002, in Appendix
I, which is the installation drawing which shows the jumper locations on the RX/TX module. The settings are used to set the
wiring style ( 4, 6 or 7), 7 being used with loop isolators. Jumpers on the RX/TX Module are noted by JP x and Wx (x = a
single digit) call-outs on the module board. Table 7-1 lists the
types of allowable configurations you can select along with their
respective jumpers.
Figure 7-3. Back Plate, 8 P.S.
August 1999
7-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
NOTE: Since the RX/TX's are not addressed by switches the
slot that they are installed in will become there address.
Example: A RX/TX installed in JP1 on the multi-loop
motherboard will become RX/TX 1, Loop 1. If the same
RX/TX was changed into JP4, the address would
become RX/TX 4, Loop 4.
7-7
INSTALLATION OF I/O MODULES
The I/O modules can be inserted into the motherboard in any
order. The CCM automatically reads the I/O modules type and
address upon registration. However, it is recommended that you
insert modules performing like functions adjacent to each other
to facilitate identification and field wiring runs. After powering
up the system, you can request a list of I/O Module assignments from the system menu to verify their registration and accuracy of module address(s).
CAUTION
All personnel installing or servicing PEGAsys equipment must wear a grounding strap when working
in the Central Control panel to avoid generating
static electricity which can destroy integrated circuits. Input / Output Module printed circuit boards
are shipped in anti-static plastic bags and should
be kept in these bags until you are ready to install
them. When you remove these circuit boards from
the Motherboard, they should be replaced in to the
appropriate bags. NEVER PACK THESE BOARDS
IN STYROFOAM OR PLASTIC PELLETS.
Figure 7-5. Installation for Multi-Loop
Table 7-1 RX/TX Configuration Selection
Jumper
Style 4
Style 6
Style 6
W/Loop
Isolator
Style 7
W1 & W2
Open
Shorted
Shorted
Shorted
JP 2
Shorted
Shorted
Open
Open
JP 3
Shorted
Shorted
Open
Open
WARNING
Input/Output Modules should never be installed in
a “powered-up” system. Always disconnect both
AC and battery power before installing or removing I/O Modules.
NOTE: Style seven (7) requires the use of loop isolators, the
RX/TX module requires the use of one (1) P/N 74200012-001 isolator module to operate in the Style 7
configuration.
a.
Remove RX/TX module from packing and inspect for physical damage.
b.
Ensure jumper configuration is set. Refer to Table 7-1 setting per wiring style used.
c.
Install loop isolator, P/N 74-200012-001, if used.
d.
Connect 24VDC wiring from terminal block (TB1-TB8) to
24VDC input plug J1. The terminal block which will be used
to power the RX/TX will be dependant upon which slot the
RX/TX will be installed into.
e.
f.
g.
To remove a I/O module from the system; secure power, remove terminal block from module, remove the two mounting
screws and pull out the module.
The following paragraphs describe the installation procedure
for each available I/O module type.
7-7.1
Signal Audible Output Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure to
install a signal audible output module into the PEGAsys system.
a.
Remove the signal audible output module from packing and
inspect for physical damage.
b.
Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235371-006 in
Appendix I for address switch settings.
c.
Place the RX/TX against the mounting bracket, in the PEGAsys, over the desired slot to be placed in. Install the two
mounting screws and tighten until snug.
Set jumpers W1-W3 for appropriate Y/Z wiring styles (refer
to Drawing No. 06-235443-006 in the back of the manual
for jumper settings).
d.
Cut jumper between W9 & W10 if using an auxiliary 24VDC
power input.
Removal of the RX/TX would be in the reverse order.
e.
Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly.
f.
Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate
Figure 5-1 or 5-2.
Install the short 6 conductor cable from the RS-232 port on
the RX/TX to either RJ12 sockets JP1-JP8. The socket selected is dependant upon which slot the RX/TX will be installed into.
76-100016-001
7-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
7-7.2
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Relay Output Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a relay output module into the PEGAsys system.
a.
Remove the relay output module from packing and inspect
for physical damage.
b.
Set address switches. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443007 in Appendix I for address switch settings.
c.
Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly.
d.
Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate
Figure 5-1 or 5-2.
7-7.3
e.
Set jumpers in accordance with Drawing No. 06-235443003 (located in the back of this manual).
f.
Install module in the desired position on the back plate of
the main or extension enclosure.
g.
Insert and tighten the four mounting screws/nuts into the
four corners of the mounting plate.
7-7.7
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion
Enclosure
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a power supply/charger assembly into the expansion
enclosure.
Agent Release Module
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a agent release module into the PEGAsys system.
a.
Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing
and inspect for physical damage.
b.
Set address switches. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443003 in Appendix I for address switch settings.
a.
Remove the agent release module from packing and
inspect for physical damage.
c.
Identify module revision by referring to Figures 3-5 and 36.
b.
Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235443005 in Appendix I for address switch settings.
d.
c.
Set switches S3 & S4 for solenoid or initiator activation (refer to drawing 06-235443-005 in the back of the
manual for switch settings).
Ensure the wiring connections between the switching power
supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main
Power Supply) are accomplished in accordance with the
appropriate Figure, Figure 7-8 or 7-9.
N
DC IN 1
L
RET
G
SPV
AC IN
L
24V
N
Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate Figure 5-1 or 5-2.
Remove the agent release module from packing and inspect for physical damage.
b.
Set module configuration. Refer to drawing 06-235443-008
in Appendix I.
c.
Install module on the motherboard. Ensure the connector
mates properly.
d.
Insert and tighten mounting screws. Refer to appropriate
Figure 5-1 or 5-2.
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-002)
b.
Set address switches. Refer to drawing 06-235443-003 in
Appendix I for address switch settings.
c.
Identify module revision by referring to Figures 3-5 and 36.
d.
Ensure the wiring connections between the switching power
supply (Aux. Power Supply) and monitor module (Main
Power Supply) are accomplished in accordance with the
appropriate Figure, Figure 7-6 or 7-7.
August 1999
WHT
BLK/WHT
attribute ?
BLK
BLK
RED
RED
ORN
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a power supply/charger assembly into the PEGAsys
system.
Remove the power supply/charger assembly from packing
and inspect for physical damage.
ORN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-001)
Power Supply/Charger Assembly
a.
RET
RET
City-Tie Output Module
a.
24V
attribute ?
SHARE
The following paragraph provides the step-by-step procedure
to install a city tie output module into the PEGAsys system.
7-7.6
L
DC IN 2
7-7.4
AC OUT
2
1
attribute ?
f.
N
attribute ?
Install module onto the motherboard. Ensure the connector mates properly.
attribute ?
e.
attribute ?
Cut jumper between W1 & W2 if using an auxiliary
24VDC power input.
BLK/WHT
attribute ?
d.
WHT
Figure 7-6. Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram
7-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
g.
WHT
BLK/WHT
ORN
RED
Insert and tighten the four mounting screws into the four
corners of the mounting plate.
Table 7-2. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev A,
Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly
RED
BLK
BLK
RET
24V
DC IN 2
SPV
RET
SPV
DC IN 1
G
24V
N
attribute ?
L
attribute ?
AC IN
L
attribute ?
attribute ?
N
attribute ?
L
attribute ?
AC OUT
2
1
SHARE
VIO
N
attribute ?
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-010)
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-002)
Aux. Power
Su p p l y
Function
M ain Supply
White
AC input (Neutral)
TB13 (N)
Black / White
AC Input (Hot)
TB13 (L)
Red
DC Output (Pos.)
TB9 (24VDC)
Black
DC Output (Neg.)
TB8 (Ret)
Orange
Share
TB9 (SHR)
Table 7-3. Aux. Power Supply Module Connections to Rev C,
Main Power Supply/Charger Assembly
WHT
BLK/WHT
BLK
BLK
VIO
RED
RED
ORN
Figure 7-7. Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram
Aux. Power Supply
Function
M ain Supply
White
AC input (Neutral)
TB13 (N)
Black / White
AC Input (Hot)
TB13 (L)
Red
DC Output (Pos.)
TB9 (24VDC)
Black
DC Output (Neg.)
TB8 (Ret)
e.
Set jumpers in accordance with drawing 06-235443-003
(located in the back of this manual).
Violet
Supervision
TB8 (SPV)
f.
Install module in the desired position on the back plate of
the expansion enclosure.
Orange
Share
TB9 (SHR)
L
AC OUT
1
2
attribute ?
N
G
N
attribute ?
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-003)
AC IN
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-001)
DC IN 1
attribute ?
L
24V
attribute ?
RET
SPV
attribute ?
SHARE
24V
RET
RET
attribute ?
L
attribute ?
N
WHT
BLK/WHT
DC IN 2
ORN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
Figure 7-8. Power Supply/Charger (Rev A), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure
L
AC OUT
1
2
attribute ?
attribute ?
N
L
attribute ?
attribute ?
N
WHT
BLK/WHT
N
AC IN
attribute ?
attribute ?
L
24V
DC IN 1
attribute ?
attribute ?
G
RET
attribute ?
attribute ?
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-010)
SPV
24V
DC IN 2
attribute ?
attribute ?
SHARE
attribute ?
attribute ?
RET
ORN
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
VIO
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
(76-100009-003)
SPV
Figure 7-9. Power Supply/Charger (Rev C), Wiring Diagram for Expansion Enclosure
76-100016-001
7-5
August 1999
PEGAsys
7-7.8.
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Power Supply Communication Connections
7-9
Both Rev. A & C communicate with the CCM over the I/O bus of
the PEGAsys system. To that end, there are different ways of
connecting these components. The power supply unit in the
main enclosure of the PEGAsys system communicates with the
CCM over a short phone style cable. The I/O bus extends out of
the power supply when needed, i.e., a motherboard installed or
other power supplies installed in expansion enclosure without a
motherboard. These two examples are accomplished as follows:
1.
2.
7-8
INSTALL AND CONNECT DC POWER
Space is provided within the Central Control Panel for two 12V
33AH sealed lead acid batteries used for 24 hour standby operation.
7-9.1
Battery Enclosure
A separate UL Listed battery enclosure, shown in Figure 7-10,
(P/N 76-100010-001) is used to house up to two 12V, 40AH,
sealed lead-acid batteries. The enclosure is designed to be surface mounted using only hardware similar to that used on the
CCP (See Paragraph 7-3) and must be mounted within 100 feet
of the panel.
Power supply in main enclosure to motherboard in main
enclosure; A flat six conductor phone type cable is attached
to “CON 2” of power supply and then inserted into the RJ12 jack on the motherboard labeled “I/O buss”. Remove
jumper “W4” to enable the terminating resistor on the motherboard, the terminating resistor is used to balance the RS485 communications.
NOTE: Wiring for the batteries to the power supply must be
sized accordingly to prevent unacceptable voltage
drops.
Power supplies installed in expansion enclosure without a
motherboard can use the RS-485 terminal block (TB1). This
connection allows the installer to connect a twisted pair
AWG-18 cable to terminals A & B of TB1 on the power
supply in the main enclosure and connect to the same terminals on the power supply in the expansion enclosure, as
shown in the following diagram. This connection must be
daisy chained to other power supplies in the expansion enclosure, if installed. Jumper W4 must be removed from all
power supplies in line except the last power supply unit in
the expansion enclosure. This will maintain the terminating
resistor at the end of the RS-485 circuit, which is required
to ensure proper operation of the RS-485 communications.
7-9.2
Batteries
Refer to Appendix A for required system power calculations.
Refer to Appendix E for FM Pre-Action/Deluge sprinkler requirements for 90-hour standby periods.
Recommended battery manufacturers and models are:
Standby
Time
Battery
24 Hours
Panasonic LCR 12V 17AP,17 AH
(P/N 06-115915-046)
60 Hours
Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (2 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001)
90 Hours
Power Sonic 12330, 33 AH (3 sets)
(P/N 89-100052-001)
The batteries should be rated for standby power use and fit
within the physical dimensions of the respective enclosure. The
batteries must have terminals that accept standard ring-type
solderless connectors.
CONNECTING AC POWER
AC power must be provided to the Central Control Panel’s internal power supply using three conductors. The AC power cable
is to be run through a conduit from a dedicated, 15 amp circuit
breaker. The conduit must be attached to the right side of the
Central Control Panel enclosure through one of the knockouts
near the upper right corner of the enclosure.
CAUTION
Do not connect the batteries to the system’s power
supply at this time. Connect the batteries at the end
of the system's installation.
See Appendix A for AC branch circuit requirements details.
Connection to the power supply must be according to drawing
06-235443-003, in Appendix I.
WARNING
High voltages may be present when connecting AC
power to the Central Control Panel. Suitable precautions must be taken to avoid injury.
NOTE: All Non-Power-Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
Insure that the circuit breaker at the dedicated AC power source
is in the OFF position. Attach the three AC power conductors to
TB1 on the Central Control Panel’s power supply PCB as shown
on drawing No. 06-235443-003, in Appendix I.
August 1999
7-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
circuits (signal & release), using unshielded cable for all circuits is only recommended when all output devices connected
are Kidde products. All conduit and conductors must meet NEC,
NFPA-72 and any applicable local code requirements. See Figure 7-12 for shielded cable termination. Optionally, the PC line
can be installed in a separate conduit as shown previously, thus
allowing the PC line to remain straight lay wire.
Figure 7-10. Battery Enclosure
Figure 7-11. Conduit to CCP
7-10
FIELD DEVICE CONNECTION TO RX/TX
MODULE
Field devices connect to terminal block (TB1) located on the
PEGAsys System’s Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX). The cable
connecting the field devices to the RX/TX module provides power
and bidirectional communications to the loop devices. One RX/
TX module can support up to 255 SmartOne addressable field
devices. These 255 addresses can be any mixture of intelligent
loop device inputs and outputs without restriction to amounts of
either inputs or outputs.
Figure 7-12. Shielded Wire to CCP
NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
NOTE: All new RCUs are shipped from Kidde with their address
set to 000. This address is reserved for unregistered
devices and cannot be used as a registered address.
You must connect unaddressed devices to the RX/TX
Module one at a time in order to address them.
Otherwise you may pre address devices using the hand
held device programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) and
connect multiple pre-addressed loop devices to the RX/
TX PC line at the same time.
7-10.1 Wiring the RX/TX PC Line
The RX/TX PC line uses Broadcast Indexing Protocol (BIP) for
communications with intelligent loop devices. The PC Line may
be configured in NFPA-72, Style 4, 6, or 7. The PC Line is capable of supporting 255 intelligent loop devices on a 2-wire loop.
Table 7-1 lists the types of allowable configurations you can
select along with the respective jumper settings for those configurations. As described in this chapter the PC line can be configured in Style 4, 6, or 7. Each Style is represented in Figures
7-13 through 7-16.
In retrofit applications, existing wiring can be used as long as it
meets NEC 760 and NFPA 72 requirements. When installing
new wiring or using existing wiring it is necessary to check line
resistance and capacitance. Total line resistance can not be
greater than 26 Ohms, and capacitance can not exceed 1.0
microFarad. Kidde recommends that you use No. 18 AWG minimum wiring as the connection cable between the RX/TX Module and the field devices
Style 4 configurations allow T-tapping. T-tapping is only limited
by sound installation techniques.
The PC line to the loop devices can be run in conduit to the
Central Control Panel cabinet. The conduit, if used must be
attached through any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knockout. Route the connection cable to TB1 on the RX/
TX PCB, and insert the end of each connection cable wire into
its proper TB1 slot and tighten the slot screws firmly. See Figure 7-11.
In retrofit applications where the PC line of the RX/TX may be
mixed in an existing conduit with appropriately loaded output
76-100016-001
7-7
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Figure 7-13. Style 4, RX/TX PC Line Connections
In the Style 6 wiring, configuration the RX/TX automatically transmits data and power bidirectionally when a break in the PC line
wiring occurs. If the break is in a single conductor, all loop devices will remain fully operational. For Style 6 PC line connections, if a PC line open trouble is encountered, use the system
reset switch on the display and control board, or push the bottom button on the RX/TX board, to reset the PC line to normal
once the fault is corrected.
August 1999
Figure 7-14. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections
Loop Isolator devices are available to support NFPA-72 Wiring
Style 7 and would be installed on the PC line of the RX/TX module. Isolator packages are available for electrical box mount
(Single Gang), 6” Base mount and RX/TX mount.
By "flanking" each group of loop devices with a pair of loop
isolators, each zone is protected from opens and shorts. A zone
is defined as a group of loop devices. In this style of installation, a short circuit between any two loop isolators will not effect
any other zone. The isolators on each side of the short will open
the PC line.
7-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Figure 7-16. Style 7, RX/TX PC Line Connection
7-11
OUTPUT SIGNAL CONNECTION
The PEGAsys System provides output signals to drive alarm
devices and communicate with central stations and control
equipment. These outputs are provided on the CCM and optional I/O modules.
Figure 7-15. Style 6, RX/TX PC Line Connections with Loop
Isolators
Each connection cable to output devices is to be run from the
output device circuit to the Central Control Panel. The cable
must be brought through any convenient Central Control Panel
enclosure knockout. Route each connection cable to the terminal block located on the respective Output Module, insert the
end of each connection cable wire into its proper terminal block
slot, and tighten the slot screws firmly.
Figure 7-16 and the RX/TX Module Installation Wiring Diagram
(Dwg. No. 06-235443-002), located in the back of this manual,
depicts a typical NFPA Style 7 installation.
NOTE: The maximum number of loop devices that can be
connected between loop isolators is 30. During a short
circuit fault condition, the control panel will register a
trouble condition for each device located between the
two affected loop isolators.
Instructions for connecting output devices are provided on their
respective Installation Wiring Diagrams located in the Appendix I of this manual. Refer to the respective manufacturer’s literature for specific installation instructions of output devices.
NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
76-100016-001
7-9
August 1999
PEGAsys
7-12
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
7-14.1 Setting and Adjusting Smoke and Heat
Detector Sensitivity Procedure
EXTERNAL POWER FAILURE INDICATOR
CONNECTION
The step-by-step procedure to perform the setting sensitivity
test follows:
The PEGAsys System provides a 2 A @ 30 VDC SPDT relay on
the power supply control unit that de-energizes (normally powered) in the event of a power supply monitor trouble - troubles
include:
•
AC Power Failure
•
24 VDC Power Supply Failure
•
Battery Failure
•
Ground Fault
•
Communications Failure
a.
(1) Press 0 (zero) key. Verify that the display reads:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
(2) Type in the Level 2 password.
(3) Press the return (↵) key. Verify that the display
reads:
1:ISOLATE
3:SET
The power supply trouble relay is normally powered so that in
the event of power failure the relay will transfer to the normally
closed position. The contact can be used to signal an external
power supply trouble indicator.
b.
c.
Select the Detector Sensitivity by typing in 3-3-2. Verify that
the display reads:
Select the desired detector style which is to have its sensitivity adjusted. After type selection, the system display:
NOTE: The user would enter the address range of the
detectors to be adjusted. The range can be from 1 to
255. The system will adjust the sensitivity of all the
specified type of detectors which were previously
chosen (Ion, Photo or Heat) within the range.
DETECTOR INSTALLATION
d.
Press the return pushbutton and the display will read:
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
PREALARM _._ (0.2 -3.0 / FT)
SETTING AND ADJUSTING SMOKE & HEAT
DETECTOR SENSITIVITIES
TOLERANCE RANGES
Setting the sensitivity of SmartOne ionization and photoelectric
smoke detectors and heat detectors is accomplished by setting
the threshold alarm and pre-alarm smoke density levels. The
SmartOne smoke detectors (Ionization and Photoelectric) were
previously programmed for a device application during the registration process.
The smoke detectors have specific sensitivities for particular
applications. There are 3 applications which represent the majority of detector use: Open Area, Open Area (High AirFlow)
and Duct.
Device
Open Area
High Velocity
Ionization
0.5 - 1.5%/FT
0.5 -1.0 %/FT
Photoelectric
0.2 - 3.5 %/FT
0.2 - 2.0 %/FT
Device
50-FT spacing
70-FT Spacing
Thermal
80° - 155° F
80° - 145° F
e.
The sensitivity adjustment is accomplished in one of two ways:
1.
Smoke & Heat Detector Configuration. During the
process of configuring the system using the PCS program, the
operator selects the application of the detector and adjusts the
settings of the alarm and pre-alarm values within the range for
the application chosen, or accept the default values for the application.
This prompt asks the user for the Pre-alarm level for the
detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired pre alarm level
and press the return key. After pressing return the display
will read:
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
ALARM _._ (0.5 -3.0 / FT)
TOLERANCE RANGE
2.
Level Setting Operation. This procedure is selected
from the menus. This method is generally used for systems
which have been installed and operational for a period of time.
It should only be used if there is a need to change the sensitivity of the device.
August 1999
2:PHOTOELECTRIC
(<) to return
SET DETECTOR SENSITIVITY
DETECTORS FROM _ _ _ _ TO _ _ _ _
Refer to the SmartOne Smoke and Heat Detector Installation
Sheet (74-212) for installation instructions. Also, refer to Chapter 2, Paragraph 2-8.6 for setting addresses and registering
RCUs.
7-14
2:LIST
4:TEST
1:IONIZATION
3:THERMAL
The connection cable to an external power supply trouble indicating device is to be run through a conduit from the indicating
device to the Central Control Panel. The conduit must be attached to any convenient Central Control Panel enclosure knockout. Connect cable to TB1 on the Central Control Panel’s power
supply PCB as shown in Figure 3-6.
7-13
Access the PEGAsys system menu’s by:
7-10
Device
Open Area
High Velocity
Ionization
0.5 - 1.5%/FT
0.5 -1.0 %/FT
Photoelectric
0.5 - 3.5 %/FT
0.5 - 2.0 %/FT
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Device
50-FT spacing
70-FT Spacing
Thermal
135° - 155° F
135° - 145° F
f.
This prompt asks the user for the alarm level for the
detector(s) to be set. Key in the desired alarm level and
press the return key. After pressing return the display will
read:
LEVELS SET ON XX DETECTORS
g.
This message verifies that the desired sensitivity adjustments were done on XX amount of detectors. The sensitivity of all specified detectors (depending on which type was
previously selected) will be set in the previous procedure.
7-15
ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE
INSTALLATION
76-100016-001
f.
Output Modules if used, are installed in the Motherboard,
addressed correctly, configured for appropriate mode of operation and their external wiring is connected correctly.
g.
Perform the Power-Up procedure in Chapter 4, Paragraph
4-5.
h.
Refer to Chapter 2 for system operations and programming.
CONNECTION OF PERIPHERALS
The parameters and connections for the RS-232 printer port
are as follows:
PARAMETERS
9600 Baud
8 Data Bits
1 Stop Bit
No Parity
NOTE: These parameters are fixed and not adjustable.
PIN and FUNCTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
TX
Signal Ground
RTS
CTS
N/C
RX
7-18.2 Connecting a Printer
Before powering up the PEGAsys for the first time, ensure that
the following has been completed:
CCM is connected to the RX/TX Module, Display Assembly, System Power Supply (I/O bus and 24 VDC), and Remote RS-232 peripheral(s) if any.
RX/TX Module is connected to the CCM (RJ-12) and system power supply (24 VDC).
The terminal or computer connection cable must have a RJ-12
type modular phone plug that connects to the CCM (use P/N
74-100016-003, for a DB9 connector for laptops, or P/N 74100016-001 for a DB25 connector for personal computers). The
connector at the terminal end must be of the type required by
the terminal device. Route the connection cable to one of the
RS-232 modular plug into the jack until it snaps into place. The
terminal or computer must be located in the same room as the
Central Control Panel.
INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
b.
e.
A UL Listed EDP terminal or computer can be connected to the
system’s RS-232 port. A 6-wire RJ-12 type modular phone jack
(PC port), located on the CCM, provides easy connection.
NOTE: All Non Power Limited wiring must be routed away from
Power Limited wiring by a minimum of 1/4", per NFPA
& UL requirements. For Power Limited Circuits use
Type FPL, FPLP, or FPLR cable per NEC Article 760.
Central Control Module (CCM), RX/TX Module and System
Power Supply are secured to the back of the enclosure.
Optional Motherboard if installed, is connected to the CCM
(I/O bus) and System Power Supply (24 VDC).
7-18.1 Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer
ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT DEVICE
INSTALLATION
a.
d.
The following paragraphs will describe how to connect a terminal or personal computer and a printer.
The Addressable Contact Output Devices are designed to be
installed in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep one-gang
box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep with a
one-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14,
#16, and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0, and 0.75 mm2 respectively)
with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to drawing
number 06-234563-001 located in Appendix I, for specific connection information on both devices. Also, refer to Chapter 2,
Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting addresses and other
parameters. The installation must comply with national and local electrical codes.
7-17
CCMs configuration jumpers configured correctly to insure
proper operation of the programmable (signal / release)
output (MP1).
7-18
The Addressable Contact Input Devices are designed to be installed in a North American 2-1/2 in. (64 mm) deep one-gang
box, or a standard 4 in. square box 1-1/2 (38 mm) deep with a
one-gang blank cover. The AI terminal block will accept #14,
#16, and #18 AWG wire (1.5, 1.0, and 0.75 mm2 respectively)
with size #18 being a minimum requirement. Refer to the wiring
the diagram in Appendix I for specific connection information.
Also refer to Chapter 2, Paragraphs 2-8.6 and 2-8.7 for setting
addresses and other parameters. The installation must comply
with national and local electrical codes.
7-16
c.
The RS-232 printer port of the CCM is a supervised connection. The installer must enable the printer port for operation.
The enabling or disabling of the printer port would be done by
accessing the 1st or 2nd level menu.
7-11
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
A simple connection cable is all that is needed to connect the
serial printer to the RS-232 port of the CCM. The following diagram represents the cable.
CCM
TX
Sig. Gnd.
RTS
CTS*
N/C
RX
PIN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
PRINTER
RX (receive data)
Sig. Gnd.
DTR*
* +8 to +12 VDC signal needed for supervision if using a graphic
annunciator.
Figure 7-17. CCM Printer Port
August 1999
7-12
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX A
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
A-1
AC BRANCH CIRCUIT
The PEGAsys fire alarm/suppression control system requires connection to a separate dedicated AC branch circuit (120 or 240
VAC), which must be labeled FIRE ALARM. This branch circuit must connect to the line side of the main power feed of the protected
premises. No other equipment may be powered from the fire-alarm branch circuit. The branch circuit wire must run continuously,
without any disconnect devices, from the power source to the fire alarm/suppression control panel. When multiple power supplies are
installed in the system enclosure(s) they must all be fed from the same circuit. Over-current protection for this circuit must comply with
Article 760 of the National Electric Code, NFPA-72 as well as applicable local codes. Use a minimum of # 14 AWG with 600-volt
insulation for this branch circuit.
Table A-1: AC Branch Circuit Requirements (120 VAC)
NOTE:
Device Type
Number of
Devices
Control Panel
1
AuxiliaryPower
Supply or
Module
(
)
Current Draw
(Amps)
Total Current
per Device
X
1.9
=
X
1.9
=
Sum column for
AC Branch
Current required
=
1.9
Amps
Each main power supply and power supply module added to the system would increase the AC requirement
by 1.9 Amps (max.)
Table A-2: AC Branch Circuit Requirements (220 VAC)
NOTE:
Device Type
Number of
Devices
Control Panel
1
AuxiliaryPower
supply
(
)
Current Draw
(Amps)
Total Current
per Device
X
0.95
=
X
0.95
=
Sum column for
AC Branch
Current required
=
0.95
Amps
Each main power supply and power supply module added to the system would increase the AC requirement
by 0.95 Amps (max.)
76-100016-001
A-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
A-2
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
SYSTEM STANDBY POWER REQUIREMENTS
The control panel provides regulated power for operating external devices, system operation, and standby battery charging. The
power for operating external devices is expandable. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply
must be evaluated for its loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.
NOTE:
Use Table A3 (Standby or non-alarm) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module
standby current requirements.
Table A-3: Standby Power Requirements (24 VDC)
Module / Device
Standby
Current(Amps)
Central Control Module
0.070
X
RXTX module
0.035
X
=
Power supply Monitor
0.060
X
=
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See
Notes 1 & 2)
X
=
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A (See
Notes 1 & 2)
X
=
1
=
Multi-Loop Mother Board
0.035
X
=
Signal Audible Output Module
0.025
X
=
Relay Output Module
0.010
X
=
City Tie Output Module
0.030
X
=
Agent Release Output Module
0.065
X
=
X
=
FIELD DEVICES
Ionization Detector
0.000400
X
=
Photoelectric Detector
0.000405
X
=
Addressable Contact Input
0.000310
X
=
Addressable Contact Output
0.000330
X
=
0.001
X
=
Loop Isolators
Sum Column for
Standby Load
(Notes 2)
NOTE:
Maximum
Standby
Current (Amps)
Module /
System
=
0.070
Amps
1. Auxiliary Outputs and each must be considered for total standby alarm loading of the system power supply.
2. Use of auxiliary 24 VDC outputs of during standby operation must not cause the calculated standby current of the
system to exceed its rated maximum as defined in the Table A-6.
August 1999
A-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
A-3
SYSTEM ALARM POWER REQUIREMENTS
NOTE:
Use Table A4 (Alarm ) to determine main system power supply and any installed auxiliary power module combination,
alarm current requirements. When using additional main power supplies in expansion cabinets, each supply must be
evaluated for its own loading in the same way as the primary power supply in the main cabinet.
Table A-4: Alarm Power Requirements (24 VDC)
Module / Device
Alarm Current
(Amps)
Central Control Module
0.210
CCM MP01 and MP02 Output (See Note 1)
Module /
System
X
1
=
0.210
X
RXTX Module
0.035
X
=
Power Supply Monitor
0.060
X
=
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A (See Note 2)
X
=
Auxiliary Output , Max 1.5A (See Note 2)
X
=
Multi-Loop Mother Board
.035
X
=
Signal Audible Output Module
0.135
X
=
X
=
Signal Module Outputs (See Note 3)
Relay Output Module
0.075
X
=
City Tie Output Module
0.080
X
=
Agent Release Output Module
0.150
X
=
Agent Release Module Signal Circuit (See
Note 5)
X
=
Agent Release Module Signal Circuits (Note
4)
X
=
FIELD DEVICES
X
=
Ionization Detector
0.000440
X
=
Photoelectric Detector
0.000445
X
=
Addressable Contact Input
0.000380
X
=
Addressable Zone Monitor
0.000400
X
=
Addressable Contact Output
0.000350
X
=
0.007
X
=
Loop Isolators (Active)
Sum Column
for Alarm
Load
NOTE:
Maximum Alarm
Current (Amps)
=
Amps
1. Central Control Module (CCM) Alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling
devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use.
2. Auxiliary Outputs would have to be considered for total alarm loading of the system power supply.
3. Each Signal output modules alarm condition power requirements must be evaluated for loading of the signaling
devices. Each signal circuit can provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use. There are a total of 4
signal circuits per module.
4. Each Agent Release module contains three signaling circuits which must be evaluated for loading. Each signal circuit
will provide up to 2 amps of 24 VDC power for signaling device use. There are a total of 3 signal circuits per module.
5. When using constant power solenoids, the current draw of the solenoid must be added in the calculation. Momentary
solenoids and initiators are negligible in there current draws and do not need to be added into the total calculation.
76-100016-001
A-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
A-4
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CALCULATING BATTERY SIZE REQUIRED
Table A-5 sums the standby and alarm loads to arrive at the battery size, in amp hours (AH), needed to support the control panel.
There is a maximum battery size which the system power supply (P/N 76-100009-010) is capable of charging. Select batteries which
meet or exceed the total amp hours (AH) calculated and are within the acceptable range of the system battery charger output, which
is 12 to 99 AH. Using the totals from Table A-3 and Table A-4, complete Table A-5 to determine the total battery (AH) capacity
necessary for the power supply.
Table A-5: Total Battery Capacity Required
Total Standby Load
(From table A-3)
(
)
Total Alarm Load(From
table A-4)
(
)
X
Required Standby Time (4, 24,
60 or 90) hours
(
)
=
X
Required Alarm Time
(5 min. enter 0.084)
(10 Min. enter 0.167)
(
)
=
Total Amp Hours Required
(Sum of above)
=
(Derating Factor) X 0.1
Total AH Required
(Original AH required +
Derating Factor)
=
NOTE: 1. Main system enclosure can house up to (2) 33 AH batteries (P/N 89-100052-001). If an auxiliary power module is added to the
system the batteries must be moved to a separate battery box or secondary enclosure, if used.
2. NFPA 72 - 1996 Protected Premises or Proprietary fire alarm systems require 24 hours of standby power followed by 5
minutes alarm activation.
3. NFPA 72 - 1996 Auxiliary or Remote Station require 60 hours of standby power followed by 5 minutes alarm activation.
4. NFPA 72 - 1996 allow 4 hours of standby battery capacity if there is an automatic starting engine driven generator.
5. NFPA 12, 12A, 12B require 24 hours of standby and five minutes of alarm activation.
6. Factory Mutual requires Pre-action and Deluge systems to have 90 hours of battery standby and 10 minutes of alarm activation.
August 1999
A-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
A-5
POWER SUPPLY/BATTERY CAPACITY.
The system is capable of charging batteries of various capacities up to 99 AH, refer to Table A-6 for details concerning battery
capacities and charging capabilities.
Table A-6. Battery Capacities
A-6
Battery (Backup Hours)
Maximum Available Standby
Current Amps
(For One Power Supply)
12 Ah (4 hours)
2.5
17 Ah (4 hours)
3.6
33 Ah (4 hours)
N/A
33 Ah (24 hours)
1.2
160 Ah (24 hours)
Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply
66 Ah (24 hours)
0.9
99 Ah (60 hours)
1.4
99 Ah (60 hours)
0.9
160 Ah (90 hours)
Not Allowed for 1 Power Supply
Maximum Available Standby
Current Amps
(For Two Power Supply)
7.1
6.0
1.6
POWER REQUIREMENT EXAMPLE
The following power calculations will be based on a the system configuration listed below:
Central Control Panel (CCP) with:
Field Devices:
-
-
-
Central Control Module
Two (2), RX/TX Modules
One (1), Power Supply Module
One (1), Multi-Loop Motherboard
Two (2), Signal Output Modules, with signal
appliances totaling .800A on each
One (1), Output Relay Module
One (1), Agent Release Output Module, has a
momentary control head on the releasing
circuit and signaling appliances totalling 0.5 A.
Ten (10), Ionization Detectors
Twenty (20), Photoelectric Detectors
Ten (10), Heat Detectors
Six (6), Addressable Contact Input Devices
Four (4), Addressable Contact Output Devices
One (1), Signaling Device, connected to MP1 of
the CCM
AC Branch Current Calculation Example: This example is based on the system specified in the previous paragraph. This system
current calculation is for a 120VAC main feed. Refer to Paragraph A-1 for additional information.
76-100016-001
A-5
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Device Type
Number of
Devices
Current Draw
(Amps)
Total Current
per Device
Control Panel
1
X
1.9
=
1.9
Auxiliary
Power Supply
(0)
X
1.9
=
0
Sum column for
AC Branch Current
required
=
1.9 Amps
Main Power Supply Loading Examples: This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph
A-2 for additional information.
Standby or Non-Alarm Power Requirement Calculation
Module / Device
Standby
Current(Amps)
Maximum
Standby
Current (Amps)
Module /
System
Central Control Module
0.070
X
1
=
0.070
RXTX module
0.035
X
2
=
0.070
Power supply Monitor
0.060
X
1
=
0.060
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A
X
=
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A
X
=
Multi-Loop Mother Board
0.035
X
1
=
0.035
Signal Audible Output Module
0.025
X
2
=
0.050
Relay Output Module
0.010
X
1
=
0.010
City Tie Output Module
0.030
X
Agent Release Output Module
0.065
X
1
=
0.065
Ionization Detector
0.000400
X
10
=
0.004
Photoelectric Detector
0.000400
X
20
=
0.008
Heat Detector
0.000400
Addressable Contact Input
0.000310
X
6
=
0.0024
Addressable Contact Output
0.000330
X
4
=
0.0016
0.001
X
=
FIELD DEVICES
Loop Isolators
10
0.004
=
Sum Column for
Standby Load
=
0.380 Amps
Alarm Power Requirement Calculation
August 1999
A-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Module / Device
Alarm
Current(Amps)
Module /
System
Maximum Alarm
Current (Amps)
Central Control Module
0.210
X
1
=
0.210
CCM MP01 and MP02 Output
0.100
X
1
=
0.100
RXTX Module
0.035
X
2
=
0.070
Power Supply Monitor
0.060
X
1
=
0.060
Auxiliary Output 1, Max 1.5A
0
X
=
Auxiliary Output 2, Max 1.5A
0
X
=
Multi-Loop Mother Board
0.035
X
1
=
0.035
Signal Audible Output Module
0.135
X
2
=
0.270
Signal Module Outputs
0.800
X
total
=
0.800
Relay Output Module
0.075
X
1
=
0.075
City Tie Output Module
0.080
X
Agent Release Module
0.150
X
1
=
0.150
0 Using
momentary
device
X
1
=
0
.500
X
1
=
0.500
Agent Release Output Circuits
Agent Release Module Signal Circuit
FIELD DEVICES
=
X
=
Ionization Detector
0.000440
X
10
=
0.0044
Photoelectric Detector
0.000445
X
20
=
0.0088
Heat Detector
0.000440
X
10
=
0.0044
Addressable Contact Input
0.000380
X
6
=
0.0026
Addressable Contact Output
0.000400
X
4
=
0.0018
0.007
X
Loop Isolators (Active)
=
Sum Column
for Alarm
Load
=
2.292 Amps
Battery Size Requirement Calculation Example: This example is based on the same system as above. Refer to Paragraph A-4
for additional information.
76-100016-001
A-7
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Battery Size Requirement Calculation
Total from Standby
Power Requirement
X
Calculation
(0.380)
Required Standby
Time (4, 24, 60 or 90)
hours
(24)
=
9.12
Total from Alarm
Power Requirement
X
Calculation
(2.292)
Required Alarm Time
(5 min. enter 0.084)
(10 Min. enter 0.167)
(0.084)
=
0.1925
Total of both sums
equals Amp Hours
Required
(Sum of Above)
=
9.312
(Derating factor) X 0.1
Total AH Required
(Original total AH
required + Derating
Factor)
0.9312
=
10.24
Example Results: The results of the prior calculations are as follows:
a.
Current requirement of the 120VAC Main Feed is 1.9 Amps.
b.
System Power Requirement when in Standby is 0.380 Amps.
c.
System Power Requirements when in Alarm is 2.292 Amps.
d.
Battery Size Requirement is 10.241 Amp-Hours. Select 12 AH batteries.
August 1999
A-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX B
SYSTEM EXPANSION
N
AC IN
L
G
N
DC IN 1
L
TB9
TB8
C
SHR
24V
RET
RET
NC
F1
+
-
2
1
S2
2
1
B
24V
R
MOTHER BD CCM
RET
24V
24V
RET
24V
RET
RET
06-129562-001
RET
24V
R
SYSTEM POWER
S1
TP3
S3
W4
A
BAT
TP4
W2 W3
PEGAsys
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
KIDDE
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W1
TBL RELAY
DS1
NO
DC IN 2
L
RET
AC OUT
1
2
SHR
N
24V
The PEGAsys system is capable of substantial expansion in the
number of RX/TX loops, I/O modules and system output power.
The system will support up to 16 I/O modules for single loop and
23 I/O modules for multi-loop - a maximum of 8 of any one type of
module. The system power supply monitor module can supervise two power supply units (4 amps each for a total of 8 amps
per module) which allows for up to 64 amps of 24 VDC power.
The following diagrams will demonstrate the available ways of
expanding the system.
AUX 1 AUX 2
Figure B-1 shows the single loop PEGAsys system (P/N 76100000-501). This includes the Central Control Module (CCM),
Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) module, Power Supply/Charger
assembly and the system enclosure. The basic system can be
expanded as shown in the following sections
AC IN
L
G
N
DC IN 1
L
TB9
TB8
C
SHR
24V
RET
RET
NC
F1
+
-
2
1
S2
2
1
B
24V
RET
R
RET
24V
MOTHER BD CCM
24V
24V
RET
24V
RET
RET
06-129562-001
R
SYSTEM POWER
S1
TP3
S3
W4
A
BAT
TP4
W2 W3
PEGAsys
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
KIDDE
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W1
TBL RELAY
DS1
DC IN 2
N
SHR
L
24V
AC OUT
1
2
RET
N
NO
AUX 1 AUX 2
Figure B-2. Single Loop with Motherboard
Figure B-3 shows the PEGAsys system with an auxiliary power
module (P/N 76-100009-002) installed. The auxiliary power supply module provides an additional 4 amps of 24 VDC power for
a total of 8 amps for system use. The unit would be installed if
the system required more than the base system's 4 amps of 24
VDC power. When the auxiliary module is installed the system
batteries are moved to a battery cabinet. P/N 76-100010-001 is
an UL listed battery enclosure for use with the PEGAsys.
This figure could also be a multi-loop system with the inclusion
of the multi-loop motherboard and additional RX/TX loop controllers.
Figure B-1. Single Loop
Figure B-2 shows the single-loop PEGAsys system with the
optional I/O motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001) installed. The I/
O motherboard provides the system with mechanical and electrical interfaces for up to eight I/O modules of any style. The I/O
modules are installed by inserting them into the desired
motherboard slot and fastening with the two screws provided.
The PEGAsys ML (Multi-loop) system (P/N 76-100000-600) looks
much the same as the system in Figure B-2 with the exception of
the multi-loop motherboard (P/N 76-100017-001) in the place of
the basic motherboard (P/N 76-100007-001). The Multi-loop
motherboard has the ability to connect up to 8 RX/TX loop controllers, for a maximum of 2040 Intelligent addressable points per
system.
76-100016-001
B-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
N
DC IN 1
L
SHR
G
L
AC OUT
1
2
TB9
TB8
TBL RELAY
W2 W3
DS1
RET
N
N
NC
L
TBL RELAY
ASHLAND, MA 01721
C
2
1
SHR
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
NC
SHR
24V
RET
DC IN 2
AC IN
L
24V
N
C
2
1
RET
L
NO
S1
24V
AC OUT
1
2
DS1
DC IN 1
L
S2
N
W4
G
NO
AC IN
L
A
N
B
L
06-129562-001
AC OUT
1
2
RET
N
N
G
N
AC IN
W2 W3
F1
W1
BAT
TP4
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
F1
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DC IN 2
TB9
TB8
N
24V
L
RET
N
AC IN
24V
G
TP3
L
RET
TBL RELAY
W1
TP4
MOTHER BD CCM
L
2
1
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S1
DS1
N
S2
BAT
C
NC
W2 W3
TBL RELAY
W2 W3
NO
AUX 1 AUX 2
DC IN 1
24V
S3
RET
F1
TB8
TB9
DC IN 2
24V
RET
24V
RET
TP4
24V
BAT
SHR
TP3
RET
SYSTEM POWER
RET
RET
24V
24V
MOTHER BD CCM
W1
RET
RET
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
RET
24V
+
-
R
RET
R
RET
24V
R
24V
R
SYSTEM POWER
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DC IN 2
W4
06-129562-001
AUX 1 AUX 2
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
TB9
24V
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TB8
SHR
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
A
RET
B
24V
F1
SHR
B
06-129562-001
RET
06-129562-001
2
1
RET
TP4
BAT
SYSTEM POWER
RET
24V
24V
R
+
-
B
RET
S2
W1
TP3
24V
S1
24V
24V
W4
A
RET
RET
2
1
24V
RET
S2
RET
24V
W4
A
2
1
R
+
-
S3
2
1
24V
RET
SHR
+
-
S3
S1
RET
PEGAsys
R
PEGAsys
KIDDE
DC IN 1
RET
RET
R
KIDDE
L
C
NC
AUX 1 AUX 2
NO
SHR
24V
S3
DS1
AUX 1 AUX 2
Figure B-4. Expanded Single Loop System
Figure B-5 shows an expanded PEGAsys system which is capable of having 8 I/O modules of various types and a maximum
24VDC power at 40 amps. This DC power would be hardwired
into signal and release modules whose loading would otherwise
cause more than 8 amps of 24 VDC current to be drawn from the
motherboard during activation.
The hardwire option allows the system installer to provide individual modules with their own power source. Refer to the particular modules installation diagram in Chapter 7 and Appendix A for
power-supply expansion guidelines.
Figure B-3. System with Auxiliary Power Supply Module
Figure B-4 shows an expanded single-loop PEGAsys system
which contains two motherboard assemblies, three complete
power supply assemblies (24 Amps of 24 VDC power), and up
to 16 total possible I/O modules. The I/O bus interconnections
between the two motherboards are done using 6 conductors
from the I/O bus terminal block on the motherboard in the main
enclosure to connect to the same terminal block on the
motherboard in the expansion enclosure. This connection allows complete supervision of all I/O modules installed on the
second motherboard by the CCM in the main enclosure. 24 VDC
power for the motherboard in the expansion enclosure would
derive from one of the power supply assemblies installed in that
enclosure. A simple two-wire connection is all that would be
required.
The power supplies need to be tied to the I/O bus for communications purposes. To accomplish this in the above example, the
installer would use a two conductor cable to connect the RX/TX
of the I/O bus from the motherboard assembly to the power supply. The second power supply could then be daisy chained to
the first to complete the communications connections.
Auxiliary power supplies in the expansion enclosure can share
a set of batteries or could support their own set of batteries
separately.
August 1999
B-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
AC IN
L
G
N
DC IN 1
L
RET
N
SHR
L
24V
AC OUT
1
2
TB9
C
NC
L
AC OUT
1
2
2
1
2
1
DS1
S1
N
NC
N
S2
RET
NOTE: One main power supply/charger assembly can be
used to charge a common set of batteries. All other power
supply/charger assemblies could be connected to the common set of batteries in parallel for backup DC power only.
You will also need to disable the charging circuit on the
additional power supply/charger assemblies by cutting
jumper W1. Be careful not to exceed the maximum charging capacity of the main power supply.
TBL RELAY
W2 W3
W4
TB8
ASHLAND, MA 01721
NO
B
TBL RELAY
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
A
SHR
24V
RET
MOTHER BD CCM
06-129562-001
DS1
C
DC IN 2
N
NO
L
G
F1
L
W2 W3
RET
24V
TBL RELAY
C
NC
W2 W3
NO
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DC IN 2
N
2
1
2
1
L
S1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
DS1
N
W4
MOTHER BD CCM
24V
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
B
RET
A
24V
F1
RET
24V
06-129562-001
RET
RET
TP4
BAT
SHR
+
-
RET
24V
24V
24V
R
R
TB9
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
B
TB8
RET
BAT
TP4
RET
RET
2
1
24V
24V
S2
RET
RET
W4
A
2
1
R
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
DC IN 1
ASHLAND, MA 01721
W1
N
AC IN
S3
24V
SHR
+
-
S3
S1
R
PEGAsys
AUX 1 AUX 2
KIDDE
RET
24V
N
AUX 1 AUX 2
AC IN
24V
G
RET
L
06-129562-001
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
24V
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
TB8
W1
24V
RET
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
06-129562-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TB9
SHR
F1
BAT
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
RET
+
-
RET
24V
24V
RET
24V
RET
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
N
2
1
2
1
L
S1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
DS1
N
W4
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
24V
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
TB9
24V
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
06-129562-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TB8
RET
F1
SHR
+
-
RET
24V
24V
RET
24V
RET
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
BAT
RET
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
N
2
1
2
1
L
S1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
DS1
N
W4
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
24V
W1
TB8
TB9
24V
RET
F1
SHR
TP4
BAT
RET
RET
24V
24V
RET
24V
RET
+
-
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
DC IN 2
Figure B-6 shows a expanded PEGAsys system which could have
16 I/O modules and 56 amps of 24 VDC power. The figure also
displays the flexibility to bring all four power supply assemblies in
the second expansion enclosure to one set of batteries. In this
arrangement one of the four power supplies charges the batteries, and all four receive standby power from the batteries. Each
power supply must have its own two conductors connected directly to the battery set to meet code requirements. The three
non-charging power supplies must have Jumper W1 cut to disable their charging circuits. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A
for more details on power expansion.
Figure B-7 shows an expanded PEGAsys ML system which could
have up to 8 RX/TX loop controllers and 9 I/O modules installed
in the two motherboards. The system also has a maximum 24
VDC power of 24 amps as shown in the diagram. Refer to Chapter 7 and Appendix A for power supply expansion guidelines.
Figure B-5. Expanded Sys. with I/O Modules & P.S.
AC IN
L
G
N
DC IN 1
L
SHR
N
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY
C
B
NC
W2 W3
A
TB9
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
NO
C
L
AC OUT
1
2
2
1
2
1
DS1
S2
S1
N
N
NC
N
W4
L
AC OUT
1
2
DS1
N
RET
06-129562-001
TBL RELAY
W2 W3
NC
2
1
2
1
TB8
ASHLAND, MA 01721
NO
S2
S1
L
TBL RELAY
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
W4
RET
B
24V
A
SHR
06-129562-001
DS1
C
DC IN 2
L
24V
AC OUT
1
2
RET
N
NO
L
G
G
N
AC IN
N
AC IN
F1
W2 W3
24V
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
N
AC IN
24V
G
RET
L
L
24V
N
N
AC IN
RET
L
G
L
RET
24V
S3
SHR
RET
RET
SHR
RET
R
24V
TB9
RET
24V
RET
24V
24V
R
TB8
RET
W1
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
24V
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
DC IN 1
DC IN 1
S3
24V
AC OUT
1
2
2
1
2
1
DS1
S2
L
S1
N
AUX 1 AUX 2
N
W4
L
AC OUT
1
2
2
1
DS1
N
2
1
06-129562-001
C
NC
SYSTEM POWER
TB9
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
W2 W3
NO
S2
S1
MOTHER BD CCM
ASHLAND, MA 01721
F1
RET
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
W4
RET
B
24V
A
RET
06-129562-001
RET
24V
R
TP4
BAT
SHR
+
-
TP3
24V
RET
24V
RET
RET
DC IN 2
24V
F1
SHR
24V
R
TB8
24V
BAT
TP4
RET
RET
24V
TP4
BAT
RET
+
-
RET
24V
TP3
ASHLAND, MA 01721
24V
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
SYSTEM POWER
B
06-129562-001
DC IN 1
S3
RET
R
TB9
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
TB8
RET
W1
24V
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
L
DC IN 1
W1
L
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
2
1
RET
24V
S2
24V
RET
W4
A
2
1
R
+
-
S3
S1
R
PEGAsys
RET
SHR
AUX 1 AUX 2
KIDDE
24V
RET
TB8
W1
TP4
TB9
24V
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET
F1
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
L
N
2
1
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
S1
DS1
N
W4
06-129562-001
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
BAT
SYSTEM POWER
SHR
+
-
TP3
24V
RET
24V
RET
RET
24V
DC IN 2
RET
F1
SHR
BAT
RET
TP3
+
-
RET
24V
24V
RET
24V
RET
SYSTEM POWER
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
24V
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
TB9
24V
DC IN 2
TBL RELAY
C
NC
B
NO
W2 W3
A
L
N
2
1
2
1
AC OUT
1
2
S2
S1
DS1
N
W4
06-129562-001
ASHLAND, MA 01721
TB8
RET
F1
SHR
+
-
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
RS485 KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
MOTHER BD CCM
TP4
BAT
RET
W1
TP3
SYSTEM POWER
L
G
N
AC IN
L
DC IN 1
S3
24V
RET
SHR
24V
RET
24V
R
R
AUX 1 AUX 2
RET
W1
TB8
TB9
24V
RET
F1
SHR
BAT
TP4
RET
RET
24V
24V
RET
RET
24V
+
-
SYSTEM POWER
TP3
DC IN 2
Figure B-6. Expanded Sys. with I/O Modules & P.S.
76-100016-001
B-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Figure B-7. Expanded ML Sys. with 8 RX/TX & 9 I/O Modules
August 1999
B-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX C
RELEASING APPLICATIONS
The PEGAsys system can be used for agent release,
pre-action, sprinkler and deluge sprinkler control applications.
When used with UL listed, compatible actuating and initiating
devices, the PEGAsys system meets the requirements of the
following standards:
NFPA 12
CO2 Extinguishing Systems (High Pressure)
NFPA 12A
HALON 1301 Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 13
Sprinkler Systems
NFPA 15
Water Spray Systems
NFPA 16
Foam-Water Deluge and Foam-Water Spray
Systems
NFPA 17
Dry-Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 17A
Wet-Chemical Extinguishing Systems
NFPA 2001
Clean-Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
C-1
leasing. For complete details refer to the PCS user’s guide.
The following features are supported for releasing functions,
with which the system will be compatible.
C-2
ABORT
The abort function is a feature which manually stops a discharge
time delay. The PEGAsys supports four styles of aborts, as listed
in Table C-1.
C-3
DELAY
The time delay period is an installer programmable value which
begins to count down after alarm activation of an initiating
device(s) which is protecting the protected area and mapped to
the agent-release output. The time delay can be programmed
for activation after one or two alarm occurrences.
PROGRAMMING
The PEGAsys system can support up to nine independently
controlled releasing outputs (AR1 - AR8 and MP1), which are
used to control releasing functions. AR1 - AR8 are the agent
release I/O modules, which are inserted into the I/O motherboard
and MP1 is the CCM releasing output, which is optionally programmable to be a signal release output. The PCS program is
used to program the system for all functions including the re-
C-4
SOAK
The soak function is used to automatically shut off the releasing solenoid at a predetermined time after the mapped inputs
activate them. It may be programmed as a 10 minute or 15 minute
soak period. This soak function is for use in NFPA 16 applications only.
Table C-1. Abort Styles
Abort Type
Description
Underwriter Laboratories Delay timer continues to count down upon abort activation, and stops at 10
(UL)(Complies with UL second mark until release of abort switch. Upon release of abort switch,
864)
timer resumes the countdown starting at 10 seconds.
Industrial Risk Insurers
(IRI)(Complies with UL
864)
Functions in similar manner to the UL-type abort, with the only exception
that the abort will only function if held prior to the receipt of the second
alarm.
New York City
Operation of the abort switch, once an alarm exists, changes the delay timer
to the selected delay plus an additional 90 seconds. The timer will not start
as long as the abort switch is held. Release of the abort switch continues
the countdown from the initial value plus the 90 seconds additional delay.
Local Jurisdiction
Once the delay timer has started, operation of the abort switch restores the
timer to its original value. The delay timer will not start as long as the abort
switch is held. Release of the abort switch continues the countdown.
NOTE: The abort function will not work if a time delay value is not entered in the EOC programming for the hazard. Maximum
allowable delay is 60 seconds as allowed by UL864. The abort input is not intended to be used for a service disconnect.
76-100016-001
C-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
Remote LED
(Optional)
PC Line
Out
PUSH / HOLD
10K ohms
P/N 06-129025-003
.
PC Line
In
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
SmartOne TM
MODEL AI, N/O
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001
SEE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235578-001
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
A B (+) (-)
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM ABORT
P/N 87875201
Addressable Contact Monitor
P/N 70-407008-001
Figure C-1. Addressable Contact Monitor Interconnection
NOTE:
The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the abort station
Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that monitor.
C-5
SPECIAL MODULE TYPES
C-5.2
supervision.
The abort switch is connected to an addressable contact monitor (P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an abort input, with a selected abort style as explained in Table C-1. The
addressable contact monitor would be connected to a listed abort
station, such as the Kidde “Suppression System Abort” switch
(+)
(-)
(-)
Remote LED
(Optional)
FIRE
ALARM
PC Line
Out
10K ohms
P/N 06-129025-003
.
(+)
Manual Release Switch
The manual release switch is an addressable contact monitor
(P/N 70-407008-001) which is programmed as an manual release input. The addressable contact monitor would be connected to a listed manual release station such as the Kidde
Suppression Agent Release switch (P/N 84-100007-00X). Figure C-2 shows the interconnection of the addressable contact
monitor and the manual release switch.
Abort Switch
PC Line
In
for
(P/N 87875201). Figure C-1 shows the interconnection of the
addressable contact monitor and the abort station switch.
The PEGAsys provides specific styles of devices which have
special releasing functions, these devices are:
C-5.1
contacts
FIRE
ALARM
PUSH
PULL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
SmartOne TM
MODEL AI, N/O
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001
SEE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235578-001
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
A B (+) (-)
R
Addressable Contact Monitor
P/N 70-407008-001
P/N 84-100007-00X
Figure C-2. Manual Release Switch
NOTE:
The 10-K ohm resistor must be connected across the manual poll station contacts for supervision.
Failure to install this resistor will result in a "Trouble Open" message for that contact monitor.
August 1999
C-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
C-6
AGENT RELEASE APPLICATIONS
C-6.1
CCM Release Output Wiring
C-7
PRE-ACTION SPRINKLER APPLICATIONS
The PEGAsys system can be used to activate and supervise preaction sprinkler and deluge sprinkler systems for protection of facilities. The CCM output (MP1) and agent release output modules
(AR1 - AR8) can be programmed for use with most popular sprinkler solenoids.
The PEGAsys system provides one output on the CCM (MP01,
Terminal TB4(A)), is fully supervised and can is defaulted as a
release output. Refer to Appendix I, Drawing No. 06-235443001, and to the PCS program user’s guide for details on the
configuration of this output.
For sprinkler applications the addressable input module P/N 70407008-00x can be used to monitor and supervise any of the following sprinkler type inputs as required for each particular
application. Inputs could be air pressure, waterflow, water level
(tank), pump running, etc. Refer to Chapter 2 for details on programming the addressable input device for various reporting
styles.
An example of the CCM releasing circuit wiring is shown in Figure C-3. For wiring details refer to the CCM wiring diagram,
Drawing No. 06-235443-001 (Appendix I).
Figure C-3. CCM Release Output, Wiring Basics
C-6.2
Release Module Output Wiring
The agent release modules which the PEGAsys system uses to
provide the release function offer one release output capable of
powering two solenoids simultaneously. Refer to Appendix I,
Drawing No. 06-235443-005, and to the PCS program user’s
guide for details on configuration of the release outputs along
with all other system parameters.
All wiring from the agent release module to the release device is
fully supervised, including the actual device in the circuit. Examples of the releasing circuit wiring is provided in figure C-4.
For all wiring detail refer to the Release Module wiring diagram,
drawing number 06-235443-005 (in Appendix I) for specific wiring details. For a list of approved devices, refer to Table 3-2 in this
manual.
Figure C-4. Release Module, Wiring Basics
76-100016-001
C-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
C-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX D
Space Reserved for Future Use.
76-100016-001
D-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
D-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX E
FACTORY MUTUAL SPRINKLER REQUIREMENTS
FOR
PRE-ACTION AND DELUGE TYPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
E-1
PEGAsys system installation applications which require Factory Mutual (FM) approval of pre-action and deluge sprinkler
systems must conform to the following guidelines.
•
•
Initiating Circuits (RX/TX - PC line) must be configured for
Style 6 wiring. Refer to Drawing No. 06-235443-002 for complete RX/TX PC line wiring instructions.
•
Provide 90 hours of standby battery and 10 minutes of alarm
operation. Refer to Appendix A.
•
Agent release output can be CCM output MP1 or I/O module agent release module AR1 - AR8. Each output would
be required to be configured for solenoid activation. The
solenoid output-on time period would need to be set to either “90 seconds” or “on until reset” using the PCS program.
GENERAL INFORMATION
SmartOne™ Thermal Detectors, Model THD-7252, when
used must be installed at 20 Ft. spacings. The pre-alarm
and alarm setpoint ranges are as follows:
Pre-alarm
80 to 155 deg F
Alarm
135 to 155 deg F
76-100016-001
E-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
E-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX F
GLOSSARY
Address
A fou r d ig it cod e in d icatin g th e ad d ress of a smart or ad d ressab l e d evice. 1st d ig it is
th e RX/TX l oop n u mb er an d th e remain in g th ree d ig its are th e d evice n u mb er.
Addressable Device
A d evice with th e cap ab il ity to au tomatical l y commu n icate its ad d ress an d state via a
mu l tip l ex tru n k to a Cen tral Con trol Pan el .
Addressable
Contact Device
(ACID)
An ad d ressab l e d evice wh ich mon itors a stan d ard fire al arm d evice. Two d evice typ es
are avail ab l e: Normal l y Op en & Normal l y Cl osed .
AdministrativeTask
Rep orts, l ists, statu s, an d oth er h ou sekeep in g fu n ction s of th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el .
AlarmVerification
A p re p rog rammed time d el ay wh ich cau ses th e system to wait for th e verification time
d el ay p eriod to el ap se b efore activatin g th e p re p rog rammed al arm ou tp u ts. Meets
th e NFPA 72 - 1993 d efin ition .
Analog
Pertain in g to rep resen tation b y mean s of a con tin u ou s variab l e an d p h ysical q u an tity.
For examp l e, to d escrib e a p h ysical q u an tity su ch as vol tag e, %/ft, etc.
Analog Input
Device
See Smart Device.
Central Control
Panel
An en cl osu re th at h ou ses Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e(CCM), Receiver/Tran smitter Mod u l e
(RX/TX), Power Su p p l y, an d op tion al I/O Moth erb oard , Ou tp u t Mod u l es.
Central Control
M odule (CCM )
Th is mod u l e is th e h eart of th e system. It con tain s th e main Cen tral Processin g Un it,
Disp l ay Assemb l y, Prog rammab l e Memory, Real Time Cl ock, Watch Dog Timer, two
RS-232-C serial p orts, two p rog rammab l e sig n al ou tp u ts an d two Form "C" rel ays.
Digital Device
A d evice with two d iscrete states, su ch as a Con tact In p u t or Rel ay Ou tp u t RCU’s.
Distributed
Intelligence
Comp u tin g p ower is d istrib u ted to th e actu al real worl d d evice. Th is red u ces th e
commu n ication b u rd en on th e l oop , th u s p rovid in g g reater immu n ity to EMI an d RFI.
Al l Al arm & Preal arm d ecision s are mad e at th e d evice l evel .
Drift Compensation
Th e CPU in p h otoel ectric or ion ization d etectors measu res an d stores its d etection
smoke ch amb er val u e 256 times p er d ay. Th e CPU averag es each d ay’s val u es an d
stores th e d ail y averag e for 30 d ays. Th e d ail y averag e is stored in a scrol l in g
fash ion ad d in g th e fin al d ay’s averag e an d d rop p in g th e averag e th at is 30 d ays ol d .
Th e val u es th at are stored refl ect th e u n iq u e en viron men tal con d ition th at th e d etector
exp erien ces in d ail y op eration . Th e su m of th e scrol l in g 30 d ays is u sed to estab l ish a
referen ce p oin t for smoke d etection u n d er th e u n iq u e en viron men tal con d ition s th at
th e d etector exp erien ces. Th is featu re red u ces fal se al arms from en viron men tal
in fl u en ces with ou t red u cin g sen sitivity.
Display Assembly
Th e d isp l ay assemb l y in cl u d es: an in d icatin g 80 ch aracter al p h an u meric d isp l ay, p u sh
b u tton switch es to con trol th e system, an d in d icatin g LED’s to d isp l ay system statu s.
Th e PEGAsys d isp l ay assemb l y is mou n ted on th e CCM an d it commu n icates with th e
Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e.
Event Output
Control (EOC)
Th e EOC p rog rammin g al l ows comb in in g of in p u ts to ob tain th e d esired ou tp u ts. Th e
EOC l an g u ag e is fl exib l e to su it most an y fire al arm / su p p ression ap p l ication .
76-100016-001
F-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Internal Identifier
(I001 - I255)
Symb ol s th at are u sed to n ame or id en tify a comb in ation of in p u ts.(For
examp l e 1001 + 1004= I001).
I/O M otherboard
An op tion al assemb l y, l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el , th at h as th e
cap acity for eig h t Ou tp u t Mod u l es. Typ ical Ou tp u t Mod u l es are Rel ay, Sig n al
Au d ib l e, Ag en t Rel ease, Dig ital In p u t or Ou tp u t an d In tel l ig en t In terface
Mod u l e.
Loop
A set of b ran ch es formin g a cl osed cu rren t p ath p rovid ed th at th e omission of
an y b ran ch el imin ates th e cl osed p ath .
Loop Isolators
A d evice wh ich p rovid es p rotection ag ain st wire to wire sh ort con d ition s on th e
RX/TX PC l in e. Con forms to (NFPA Styl e 7.0)
M ulti drop Line
Lin e or circu it in tercon n ectin g several d evices from a cen tral p oin t.
M ultiplex
(Per NFPA-72)
Th e u se of on e tru n k or p air of wires to commu n icate with on e or more d evices.
Th e PEGAsys al l ows 255 d evices to commu n icate on on e tru n k.
Optional Relay
Smart d evices or smoke d etectors may b e ord ered with an op tion al rel ay th at
can con trol extern al d evices su ch as el evators an d n on -emerg en cy p rocess
con trol .
Output M odule
Ou tp u t Mod u l es, l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el en cl osu re, p rovid e real
worl d ou tp u t cap ab il ity from th e Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e. Typ ical mod u l es are:
Rel ay an d Sig n al Au d ib l e.
Owner Locations
Memory l ocation s th at are p rog rammab l e b y th e own er to store a 40 ch aracter
al p h an u meric d escrip tion of th e l ocation of th e fire d etection d evice.
PC Line
Power an d commu n ication wires orig in atin g from th e RX/TX Mod u l e. Al so
cal l ed Sig n al Lin e Circu it (SLC).
Relay Output M odule
An Ou tp u t Mod u l e l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el en cl osu re th at
in terfaces with au xil iary eq u ip men t. Each mod u l e con tain s fou r in d ivid u al
p rog rammab l e SPDT 2 Amp 24 VDC rel ays. A total of eig h t Rel ay Ou tp u t
Mod u l es may b e u sed in th e system for a total of 32 circu its.
Relay Output RCU
An ad d ressab l e or smart fiel d d evice th at p rovid es a rel ay con tact to con trol a
d evice su ch as a fan . Typ ical l y mou n ts in a 4 in ch sq u are el ectrical b ox.
Remote Control Unit
(RCU)
An ad d ressab l e or smart fiel d d evice.
RX/TX M odule
Th e Receiver / Tran smitter mod u l e is l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol
Pan el en cl osu re an d fu n ction s as a d ata tran smission in terface b etween th e
Cen tral Con trol Mod u l e an d remote con trol u n its - (RCU’s).
Signal Audible Output
M odule
An ou tp u t mod u l e, l ocated in th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el en cl osu re, th at
p rovid es fou r Styl e Z or Styl e Y, 24 V, 2 Amp p ol arized sig n al circu its. Al l
circu its are su p ervised for an op en or sh ort con d ition . A maximu m of eig h t
mod u l es with 32 circu its may b e in stal l ed in th e PEGAsys system.
Smart SmokeDetector
Smart smoke d etectors (ion ization or p h otoel ectric) measu re smoke l evel every
9 secon d s with in th eir smoke sen sin g ch amb er. After in itail l y d etectin g smoke
th e d etector en ters an al ert state wh ere it measu res smoke con cen tration every
2 secon d s. If th e d etector d etects smoke th ree ou t of fou r samp l es, it sen d s a
p re-al arm or al arm statu s to th e Cen tral Con trol Pan el .
Smart Device
A d evice with th e featu res of an ad d ressab l e d evice b u t ad d ition al l y h as th e
comp u tin g p ower to make al arm d ecision s b ased on stored cal ib ration an d
en viron men tal d ata, an d con d ition of th e d etector. Al so th e d evice tran smits
an d receives an al og val u es. Examp l es wou l d b e p h otoel ectric or ion ization
d etectors.
Standard Fire Alarm
Device
A d evice with ou t th e el ectron ics n ecessary to tie d irectl y to th e mu l tip l ex tru n k.
It req u ires an ad d ressab l e in p u t or ad d ressab l e ou tp u t d evice to in terface with
th e PEGAsys system. (ie..con ven tion al smoke an d h eat d etectors)
August 1999
F-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
State
A code on the display that identifies an RCU’s status. There are eight field
programmable states a RCU may be programmed to: Alarm, Trouble, Abort,
Manual Alarm, Manual Release, WaterFlow, Supervisory and Normal.
System Power
Supply
Provides primary and secondary system power. Stand-by batteries, provide DC
voltage to the Power Supply in the event of an AC power failure. The stand-by
batteries are located in the Central Control Panel enclosure.
T-TAP
See Multi drop Line. Only allowable in Style 4 configuration.
Trouble Relay
A non programmable relay which operates during any system trouble condition.
Type
A message on LCD display that identifies the type of device reporting. The
message identifies Smoke & Heat detectors and Input and Output RCU devices.
Variable Identifier
See Internal Identifier (I001-I255).
M odule Watch Dog
Timer
This timer senses abnormality in the Central Control Module’s CPU. If the CPU is
operating normally, it periodically resets the timer. If the timer is not reset, it times
out and indicates a CPU error.
%/FT
Percent of smoke obscuration per foot of light.
76-100016-001
F-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
F-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX G
DISPLAY ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviation
Meaning
Abbreviation
Meaning
232
RS-232-C
OF
Off
A.V.
Alarm Verification
OK
All Right
ACK
Acknowledge
OP
Open
ADDR.
Address
OR
Optional Relay
ALM
Alarm
OUT
Output
AOF
Alarm Off
P.C.
Power Communications Line
BAT.
Battery
P.S.
Power Supply
C.L.
Combinational Logic
P.W.
Password
CD
Contact Detector Error
POF
Pre-alarm Off
CT
City Tie
PRE
Pre-alarm
DISCON
Disconnect
PRNT
Printer
DISP
Panel Display
PROG
Program
DR
Drift Error
R.P.
Remote Panel
EW
EEPROM Write Error
RTC
Real Time Control
EX
External Trouble
RY
I/O Relay Output Module
INP
Input
SG
I/O Signal Output Module
IT
Illegal RCU Type
SH
Short
I/O
Input / Output Module
SPV
Supervisory
L9
Line + 9V Trouble
TBL
Trouble
LEV.
Level
TE
RCU Test No Good
LV
Line Voltage Trouble
TOF
Trouble Off
NA
NOV RAM Access Error
TST
RCU Test
NG
No good
UK
Unknown Device Connected
NR
Not Registered
VOLT.
Voltage
O.L.
Owner Location
ZA
Zone Alarm
76-100016-001
G-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
G-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX H
INDEX
Subject
Page
Paragraph
A
Accessing the System Menus .......................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.2
Active Alarm Mode ............................................................................................ 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2
Active Supervisory Trouble Mode ..................................................................... 2-10 ................................................. 2-6.3
Active Trouble Mode ......................................................................................... 2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4
Addressable Contact Input Device Installation .................................................. 7-11 ................................................. 7-15
Addressable Contact Input Devices ................................................................. 1-5, 3-11 .......................................... 1-2.11,3-3.14
Addressable Contact Monitor Registration ....................................................... 2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7.2
Addressable Relay Output Device Installation .................................................. 7-11 ................................................. 7-16
Addressable Relay Output Devices .................................................................. 1-5, 3-12 .......................................... 1-2.12, 3-3.15
Addressing I/O Modules ................................................................................... 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.4
Addressing RCUs ............................................................................................. 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.6
Agent Release Module ...................................................................................... 3-9, 7-4 ........................................... 3-3.8, 7-7.3
Agent Release Output Module .......................................................................... 1-4 ................................................... 1-2.7.3
Alarm Mode Indications .................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2.1
Alarm Mode User Action ................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.2.2
Alarm Simulation Test (AST) ............................................................................ 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.5
Arming Release Circuits .................................................................................. 4-3 ................................................... 4-4.2
AST Procedure ................................................................................................. 4-3 ................................................... 4-3.5.1
Audible Device .................................................................................................. 2-2 ................................................... 2-2.2
B
Basic Motherboard ........................................................................................... 1-2 ................................................... 1-2.5
Batteries ........................................................................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-9.2
Battery Enclosure ............................................................................................. 7-6 ................................................... 7-9.1
Battery Test ...................................................................................................... 4-1 ................................................... 4-3.3
C
Central Control Module (CCM) .......................................................................... 1-1, 3-2, 5-2 .................................... 1-2.1, 3-3.1, 5-4.2
City Tie Module ................................................................................................. 1-4, 3-10 .......................................... 1-2.7.4, 3-3.9
City Tie Output Module ..................................................................................... 7-4 ................................................... 7-7.4
Component Description .................................................................................... 1-1 ................................................... 1-2
Connecting a Printer ......................................................................................... 7-11 ................................................. 7-18.2
Connecting a Terminal or Personal Computer .................................................. 7-11 ................................................. 7-18.1
Connecting AC Power ...................................................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-8
Connection of Peripherals ................................................................................ 7-11 ................................................. 7-18
Control and Indicator Description ..................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-2.3
Control and Indicators ...................................................................................... 2-1 ................................................... 2-2
D
Default Passwords ........................................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-3.2
Detector Installation .......................................................................................... 7-10 ................................................. 7-13
Detector Registration ....................................................................................... 2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7.1
Disarming and Rearming Release Circuits ...................................................... 4-3 ................................................... 4-4
Disarming Release Circuits ............................................................................. 4-3 ................................................... 4-4.1
Display Control Card (DCC) .............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3.3
Display Module ................................................................................................. 1-1 ................................................... 1-2.2
76-100016-001
H-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
INDEX (Cont.)
Subject
Page
Paragraph
E
Enable/Disable RTC Program Line Numbers ................................................... 2-12 ................................................. 2-8.2.2
Entering Passwords ......................................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-3.3
EOC Programming .......................................................................................... 2-11 ................................................. 2-8.1
Exiting the System Menus ................................................................................ 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.3
External Power Failure Indicator Connection .................................................... 7-10 ................................................. 7-12
F
Field Device Connection to RX/TX Module ....................................................... 7-7 ................................................... 7-10
Field Devices .................................................................................................... 3-11, 5-3 .......................................... 3-3.10, 5-4.4
Functional Descriptions .................................................................................... 3-2 ................................................... 3-3
I
Input/Output Modules ........................................................................................ 1-3 ................................................... 1-2.7
Install and Connect DC Power ......................................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-9
Installation Checkout ........................................................................................ 7-11 ................................................. 7-17
Installation Procedure for Central Control Panel ............................................... 7-1 ................................................... 7-3
Installation Procedure for Expansion Enclosures ............................................. 7-1 ................................................... 7-4
Installation Procedure for I/O Motherboard ....................................................... 7-2 ................................................... 7-5
Installation Procedure for RX/TX Module .......................................................... 7-2 ................................................... 7-6
Installation Procedure for I/O Module ................................................................ 7-3 ................................................... 7-7
Intelligent Loop Devices .................................................................................... 1-4 ................................................... 1-2.9
Isolate Menu Function ....................................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.1
L
Lamp Test ......................................................................................................... 4-1 ................................................... 4-3.1
LCD Display ..................................................................................................... 2-1 ................................................... 2-2.1
Levels of Security ............................................................................................. 2-2 ................................................... 2-3.1
List Menu Function ........................................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.2
Listing all Registered RCUs .............................................................................2-15 ................................................. 2-8.7.4
Listing EOC Programming ...............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.1.1
Listing I/O Module Assignment ......................................................................... 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.5.1
Listing RTC Programming ................................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.2.1
Loop Device Test .............................................................................................. 4-1 ................................................... 4-3.2
Loop Isolator Devices ....................................................................................... 1-6 ................................................... 1-2.14
Loop Isolator Devices ....................................................................................... 3-12 ................................................. 3-3.17
M
Maintenance Procedures ................................................................................. 4-1 ................................................... 4-3
Materials Required for Installation ..................................................................... 7-1 ................................................... 7-2
Menu Functions ................................................................................................ 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4
Menu Structure ................................................................................................. 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.1
Mode of Operation ............................................................................................ 2-1 ................................................... 2-1.1
Model DH-2000 Air Duct Housing ..................................................................... 1-5, 3-12 .......................................... 1-2.13, 3-3.16
Modes of Operation .......................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6
Multi-Loop Motherboard .................................................................................... 1-3, 3-6 ........................................... 1-2.6, 3-3.5
August 1999
H-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
INDEX (Cont.)
Subject
Page
Paragraph
N
Normal Standby Mode ...................................................................................... 2-5 ................................................... 2-6.1
O
Output Signal Connection ................................................................................. 7-9 ................................................... 7-11
Overall Block Diagram Description .................................................................. 3-1 ................................................... 3-2
P
Parts List .......................................................................................................... 6-1 ................................................... 6
Power-Down Procedure ................................................................................... 4-3 ................................................... 4-5.1
Power-Down System ....................................................................................... 4-3 ................................................... 4-5
Power-Up Procedure ........................................................................................ 4-4 ................................................... 4-6.1
Power-Up System ............................................................................................ 4-4 ................................................... 4-6
Power Checks .................................................................................................. 5-1 ................................................... 5-2.2
Power Supply Communication Connections .................................................... 7-6 ................................................... 7-7.7
Power Supply/Charger Assembly ..................................................................... 1-2, 7-4 ........................................... 1-2.4, 7-7.5
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Expansion Enclosure ................................. 7-4 ................................................... 7-7.6
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision A .................................................. 3-4 ................................................... 3-3.3
Power Supply/Charger Assembly, Revision C .................................................. 3-5 ................................................... 3-3.4
Printing Operation ............................................................................................. 2-11 ................................................. 2-7
R
Receiver/Transmitter (RX/TX) Module .............................................................. 1-2, 3-3 ........................................... 1-2.3, 3-3.2
Registering I/O Module Assignments ............................................................... 2-13 ................................................. 2-8.5
Registering RCUs ............................................................................................2-14 ................................................. 2-8.7
Relay Output Module ........................................................................................ 1-3, 3-8, 7-4 .................................... 1-2.7.2, 3-3.7,
.................................................................................................................................................................................. 7-7.2
Remote Control Unit (RCU) ............................................................................. 2-12 ................................................ 2-8.3.2
Remote Relay Registration .............................................................................. 2-15 ................................................ 2-8.7.3
Removal and Replacement ............................................................................. 5-2 .................................................. 5-4
Required Tools ................................................................................................ 5-2 .................................................. 5-4.1
RTC Programming ........................................................................................... 2-12 ................................................ 2-8.2
RX/TX Loops .................................................................................................... 2-13 ................................................ 2-8.3.4
RX/TX Module ................................................................................................. 5-2 .................................................. 5-4.3
S
Scheduled Maintenance .................................................................................. 4-1 .................................................. 4-2
Set Menu Function .......................................................................................... 2-4 .................................................. 2-5.4.3
Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivities ........................... 7-10 ................................................ 7-14
Setting and Adjusting Smoke & Heat Detector Sensitivity Procedure ............ 7-10 ................................................ 7-14.1
Signal Audible Output Module ......................................................................... 7-3 .................................................. 7-7.1
Signal Output Module ...................................................................................... 1-3, 3-7 ........................................... 1-2.7.1, 3-3.6
SmartOne Detector Bases ............................................................................... 1-5 .................................................. 1-2.10
SmartOne Heat Detectors ............................................................................... 1-5, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.3, 3-3.13
SmartOne Ionization Detectors ........................................................................ 1-4, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.1, 3-3.11
SmartOne Photoelectric Detectors .................................................................. 1-5, 3-11 ......................................... 1-2.9.2, 3-3.12
Standard Fault Isolation Techniques ............................................................... 5-1 .................................................. 5-2
Standby Batteries ............................................................................................ 1-4 .................................................. 1-2.8
Supervisory Trouble Mode Indication .............................................................. 2-10 ................................................ 2-6.3.1
76-100016-001
H-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
INDEX (Cont.)
Subject
Page
Paragraph
Supervisory Trouble Mode User Action .............................................................2-10 ................................................. 2-6.3.2
System Components ....................................................................................... 1-1 ................................................... 1-1.2
System Description .......................................................................................... 1-1 ................................................... 1-1.1
System I/O Modules .........................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.3.5
System Inputs ...................................................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3.1
System Menus .................................................................................................. 2-4 ................................................... 2-5
System Outputs ...............................................................................................2-13 ................................................. 2-8.3.4
System Power-Up ............................................................................................ 2-2 ................................................... 2-4
System Programming ...................................................................................... 2-11 ................................................. 2-8
System Security ............................................................................................... 2-2 ................................................... 2-3
System Specification ........................................................................................ 1-6 ................................................... 1-3
T
Test Menu Function .......................................................................................... 2-4 ................................................... 2-5.4.4
Trouble Mode Indications .................................................................................. 2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4.1
Trouble Mode User Action ................................................................................. 2-11 ................................................. 2-6.4.2
Troubleshooting ................................................................................................ 5-1 ................................................... 5-3
Troubleshooting and Corrective Maintenance ................................................... 5-1 ................................................... 5
Types of Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................2-12 ................................................. 2-8.3
U
Un-registering RCUs ........................................................................................ 2-15 ................................................. 2-8.7.5
V
Visual Inspection .............................................................................................. 5-1 ................................................... 5-2.1
W
Walk Test .......................................................................................................... 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4
Walk Test Procedure ........................................................................................ 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4.2
Walk Testing Detectors .................................................................................... 4-2 ................................................... 4-3.4.1
Wiring the RX/TX PC Line ................................................................................ 7-7 ................................................... 7-10.1
August 1999
H-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX I
SYSTEM DRAWINGS
This appendix provides installation diagrams and instructions for various PEGAsys system modules.
COMPONENT
DRAWING No.
PAGE No.
Central Control Module
06-235443-001
I-2
Receiver/Transmitter Module
06-235443-002
I-6
Power Supply Module (Revision XC)
06-235443-003
I-8
Power Supply Module (Revision AC)
06-235443-003
I-9
Agent Release Module
06-235443-005
I-11
Signal Audible Module
06-235443-006
I-14
Relay Output Module
06-235443-007
I-17
City Tie Module
06-235443-008
I-18
Basic I/O Motherboard
06-235443-011
I-20
Multi-Loop Motherboard
06-235443-012
I-22
Addressable Input Device
06-234563-001
I-24
Addressable Output Device
06-234563-001
I-25
Addressable Input Device
New Design
I-26
Addressable Output Device
New Design
I-27
76-100016-001
I-1
August 1999
REP 2
REP 1
TB4
VOLT FREE RELAYS
1
2
NO NC C NO NC
SOUNDER 2
A
B
+
+
-
TB5
TB1
PEGAsys
August 1999
SOUNDER 1
A
B
+
+
-
V/F RELAY
FAULT
NO NC C
C
TB3
TB2
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
SEE NOTE 1
CCM RESET
BUTTOM
JP4
JP3
SEE NOTE 1
JP1
SW1
SEE NOTE 1
IC1
JK5
I/O
PORT
JP2
TO I/O MODULES AN
POWER SUPPLIES
24V 5V
P.C.
PORT
PLG1
0V
5V 0V
DISPLAY
TO RX/TX
LOOP
CONTROLLER
24V
PRINT
PORT
0V
TB6
1
DISP
PORT
JK4
PLG2
EARTH
FLT
SUPPLY
FLT
I-2
JK3
JK2
JK1
RX/TX
PORT
BT1
TO EXTERNAL PRINTER OR INTELLIGENT GRAPHIC ANNUNCIATOR
DISPLAY PORT
TB6
PLG2
PLG3
DISPLAY RESET
SW1
PLG6
JK3
PLG1
JK2
PLG2
JK1
76-100016-001
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display & Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-001
REVISION
AD
SHEET
1 of 4
PROCESSOR
PORT
24VDC FROM
POWER SUPPLY
24VDC FROM
POWER SUPPLY
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TO REMOTE PC
FOR PROGRAMMING
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
76-100016-001
NOTES:
1. JUMPER ARRANGEMENTS FOR SOUNDER 1
SIGNAL SOUNDER
JP1
JP2
JP3
JP4
AGENT RELEASE
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
8. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES
SOLENOIDS
2. SOUNDER/RELEASE CIRCUITS ARE RATED AT 24VDC, 2A POWER LIMITED.
SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4mA/CIRCUIT
3. ALL RELAY OUTPUTS (VOLT/FREE RELAYS AND V/F RELAY) ARE RATED
AT 30VDC, 1A.
4. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE RESISTOR (EOR) 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH PANEL.
AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001 (KIT OF 50).
5. IF MP01 IS CONFIGURED AS A RELEASING OUTPUT,
A 220 OHM (5W MIN.) RESISTOR COULD BE USED TO SIMULATE
THE CIRCUIT IF NO SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.
CAUTION: DO NOT USE RESISTOR IF SOLENOID IS CONNECTED.
6. TO GUARANTEE THE REQUIRED VOLTAGE AT THE RELEASING DEVICE, THE
FOLLOWING TABLE SHALL BE USED.
890181
899175
895630
897494
486500
486500-01
FM GROUPS
SPRINKLER
SOLENOIDS
A,B,D,E,G
9. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION
REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS
75.XXX
EX: TO DETERMINE THE TOTAL LOOP LENGTH, MEASURE THE DISTANCE
BETWEEN THE CONTROL HEAD AND THE CONTROL PANEL TERMINAL
BLOCK, THEN MULTIPLY BY TWO.
I-3
DEVICE
RELEASING
PART NO.
890181
899175
895630
897494
486500
486500-01
FM
SOLENOID
GROUP
A
B,D
E,G
12 AWG
300
300
300
380
3000
3000
1440
940
1570
WIRE LENGTH (FT.)
14 AWG 16 AWG
200
120
200
120
200
120
240
150
2000
1200
2000
1200
760
480
500
300
760
525
S
- FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS.
L
- FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS.
18 AWG
800
800
340
220
370
POSITION OF RELAY OUTPUTS DURING NORMAL STANDBY MODE.
VOLT FREE RELAYS
(PROGRAMMABLE)
FAULT RELAY
V / F RELAY
FAULT
MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
NO
NC
C
TB1, TB2
NO
NC
C
TB3
DEVICE
I max.
RESISTANCE (min.)
"ON" TIME
890181
899175
895630
897494
486500
486500-01
FM
SOLENOID
GROUP
2.4 A
2.4 A
2.0 A
1.5 A
240 mA
240 mA
458 mA
700 mA
420 mA
10 OHM
10.8 OHM
12 OHM
15.9 OHM
103 OHM
103 OHM
52 OHM
34 OHM
57 OHM
MOMENTARY
MOMENTARY
MOMENTARY
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
CONTINUOUS
A
B,D
E,G
NOTE: THE TROUBLE RELAY CONTACTS
ARE SHOWN IN THE UNPOWERED STATE.
PEGAsys
August 1999
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display & Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-001
REVISION
AD
SHEET
2 of 4
7. RELEASING OUTPUT DEVICES SPECIFICATION
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display & Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-001
REVISION
AD
SHEET
3 of 4
August 1999
I-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram CCM/
Display & Control Assembly
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-001
REVISION
AD
SHEET
4 of 4
76-100016-001
I-5
August 1999
T1
I-6
J3
1
RX/TX ASSEMBLY
74-200005-001
12
W1
SHORT-1
JP3 JP2
T1
PC LINE RESET SW2
CPU RESET SW1
LED1
LED2
CPU RESET
PC LINE NORMAL
MODULE
J2
LOOP ISOLATOR
RX/TX
W2
J1
RET
(BLK)
SEE NOTE 4
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
August 1999
J3
24 VDC
(RED)
(OPTIONAL)
LOOP ISOLATOR
74-200012-001
RX/TX
SEE NOTE 4
RS232 PORT
FOR COMMUNICATION
WITH CCM.
24 VDC
FROM POWER
SUPPLY
OPEN
IN
IN
JP2
JP3
OUT
OUT
OPEN
OPEN
LED 1 - RED LED INDICATES RXTX RESET WHEN ON.
LED 2 - GREEN LED INDICATES NORMAL OPERATION OF RXTX PC LINE
TRANSMITTER WHEN BLINKING.
SW 1 - CPU RESET.
SW 2 - PC LINE REST / DISCONNECT 24V FROM TERM. 2 & 3.
26.4 VDC
19.0 VDC
1.0 uF
26.0 OHMS
255
100 mV RMS
SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
5. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
4.2- WHEN LOOP ISOLATOR USED:
PLUG IN THE LOOP ISOLATOR (RXTX) 74-200012-001
AND INTERCONNECT IT USING FLEX CABLES TO J3 ON
RXTX. MAKE SURE THAT UNEVEN PINS ARE
INTERCONNECTED.
MAX VOLTAGE:
MIN. VOLTAGE:
MAX. LINE CAPACITANCE:
MAX. LINE RESISTANCE:
MAX. NUMBER OF RCU'S:
MAX. RIPPLE VOLTAGE:
STYLE 7
SHORTED
SHORTED
STYLE 6 w/LOOP ISO.
4.1- STYLE SEVEN (7) REQUIRES THE USE OF LOOP
ISOLATORS, THE RXTX MODULE REQUIRES THE USE
OF ONE (1) P/N 74-200012-001 ISOLATOR MODULE
TO OPERATE IN THE STYLE 7 CONFIGURATION.
IN
IN
STYLE 6
SHORTED
STYLE 4
JUMPER
W1 & W2
1. SMART DEVICES MAY UTILIZE T-TAP WIRING METHOD IN
STYLE 4 CONFIGURATION ONLY.
2. MAXIMUM OF 255 LOOP DEVICES PER RX/TX
LOOP. ANY COMBINATION OF DEVICE TYPE
IS ACCEPTABLE.
3. MAXIMUM 20 LOOP ISOLATORS EXCLUDING ONE ON RX/TX
CAN BE INSTALLED ON PC LINE. NO MORE THAN 30 LOOP
DEVICES BETWEEN TWO ADJACENT LOOP ISOLATORS.
STYLE 6 (4-WIRE) PC LINE CONFIGURATION IS RECOMMENDED
TO FULLY UTILIZE LOOP ISOLATION FUNCTION.
4. ARRANGEMENTS FOR PC LINE WIRING
NOTES:
ANALASER INTERFACE MODULE
PRODUCT NO. 89-100081-001
LOOP ISOLATORS:
PRODUCT NO.'S
RXTX
74-200012-001
ELECT. BOX 74-200012-002
BASE MOUNT 74-200012-004
RELAY OUTPUT DEVICES:
PRODUCT NO.'S 70-408002-000
70-408003-000
70-408004-001
CONTACT INPUT DEVICES:
PRODUCT NO'S. 70-407002-00X
70-407003-001
70-407004-001
70-407008-001
70-407008-002
SMART DETECTORS USED:
PRODUCT NO'S. 70-401001-000
70-401004-000
71-401001-000
71-401004-000
70-402001-100
71-402001-100
70-404001-100
70-403001-XXX
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
SHORT-2
RX/TX
76-100005-001
1 2 3 4
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-002
REVISION
AC
SHEET
1 of 2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Receiver/Transmitter Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-002
REVISION
AC
SHEET
2 of 2
76-100016-001
I-7
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-003
REVISION
XC
SHEET
1 of 1
August 1999
I-8
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-003
REVISION
AC
SHEET
1 of 2
76-100016-001
I-9
August 1999
PEGAsys
N
L
N
AC OUT
2
1
L
L
AC IN
G
24V
N
VIO
RED
RED
ORN
BLK
BLK
AUXILIARY POWER SUPPLY
DC IN 1
RET
BLK/WHT
SPV
WHT
MAIN POWER SUPPLY
BLK
BLK
DC IN 2
SHARE
RED
VIO
24V
RED
SPV
RET
ORN
WHT
BLK/WHT
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Power Supply
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-003
REVISION
AC
SHEET
2 of 2
August 1999
I-10
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-005
REVISION
AD
SHEET
1 of 3
76-100016-001
I-11
August 1999
August 1999
2
1
3
6
5
4
3
2
1
CKT #2
CKT #1
L
S
L
S
2
2
1
1
3
3
CONTROL HEAD
DAUL
-
+
-
+
TB1
6
5
4
3
2
1
I-12
SOLENOID
-
YEL
-
+
+
6
5
4
6
5
4
3
WHT
BLU
WHT
S
L
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS.
YEL
BLK
YEL
BLK
-
+
-
+
6
5
4
3
L
-
+
6
5
4
3
2
BLK
-
+
-
+
6
5
4
3
CKT #2
CKT #1
S
S
L
L
BLK
RED
BLK
RED
TWO SOLENOIDS
(U.L. LISTED)
-
+
-
+
TB1
IS TO BE 6.0 OHMS.
6
5
4
3
2
1
CKT #2
CKT #1
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
S
RED
2
2
SINGLE SOLENOID
TB1
2
L
L
-
+
1
SOLENOID PART NO. 486500, 486500-01
1
S
S
S
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
IS TO BE 0.7 OHMS.
1
BLU
-
+
-
3
2
L
TWO SOLENOIDS
TB1
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
S
L
+
1
SINGLE SOLENOID
TB1
(U.L. LISTED)
SOLENOID PART NO. 897494
1
TB1
CKT #2
CKT #1
TWO SOLENOIDS
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
NOTES:
SAFETY FUSE
WHT
BLU
L
TB1
BLK
SINGLE SOLENOID
SOLENOID PART NO. 899175
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 0.6 OHMS.
MICROSWITCH
S
-
+
-
+
TB1
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
NOTES:
S
L
CONTROL HEAD
SINGLE
(U.L. LISTED)
SOLENOID PART NO. 890181 AND 895630
-
12
11
10
9
8
7
TB1
+
-
+
-
+
-
TB1
2
1
CKT #2
CKT #2
CKT #1
S
S
S
10K EOR
L
10K EOR
L
10K EOR
L
SIGNAL CIRCUITS
NOTE:
JUMPERS W1 & W2 TO BE REMOVED
WHEN AUXILARY POWER USED.
RET.
+24V
AUXILARY POWER
CONNECTION
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-005
REVISION
AD
SHEET
2 of 3
76-100016-001
76-100016-001
-
+
-
6
5
4
3
2
CKT #2
CKT #1
S
S
L
L
-
+
-
+
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE IS TO BE 2.3 OHMS.
6
5
4
3
2
1
CKT #2
CKT #1
TWO SOLENOIDS
TB1
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
NOTES:
S
L
+
1
SINGLE SOLENOID
TB1
GROUP A
(U.L. LISTED)
I-13
S
L
S
L
-
+
-
+
6
5
4
3
2
1
SINGLE SOLENOID
TB1
GROUP B,D
S
S
L
(U.L. LISTED)
L
-
+
-
+
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
5
4
3
2
CKT #2
CKT #1
S
S
L
L
-
+
-
+
6
5
4
3
2
1
TWO SOLENOIDS
TB1
IS TO BE 2.5 OHMS.
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
-
+
-
+
1
SINGLE SOLENOID
TB1
(U.L. LISTED)
GROUP E,G
2. MAXIMUM CIRCUIT WIRING RESISTANCE
IS TO BE 1.5 OHMS.
CKT #2
CKT #1
TWO SOLENOIDS
TB1
NOTES:
1. SWITCH S1 AT "SOL" POSITION. SWITCH S3,1 TO "OFF ".
FM GROUP SPRINKLER SOLENOIDS
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Release Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235371-005
REVISION
AD
SHEET
3 of 3
August 1999
PEGAsys
August 1999
NOTES:
06-129569-001
1. MAXIMUM OUTPUT CURRENTS:
SIGNAL CIRCUIT - 2.0 A
SUPERVISORY CURRENT - 2.4 mA/CIRCUIT
SIGNAL AUDIBLE MODULE
2. NOMINAL VOLTAGE 24.0 VDC
ON
1 2 1 2 1 2
RESET SWITCH
TROUBLE LED
SIG. AUD.
76-100003-001
1
SWITCH POSITION
SW2,2
SW1,1
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
SW1,2
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
5. EITHER SOUNDER OUTPUT (2) MAY BE CONFIGURED
FOR EITHER 2 STYLE "Y" OR 1 STYLE "Z", USING
JUMPER AND DIP SWITCH SETTINGS SHOWN ON SHEETS 2 & 3.
TB1
SEE NOTE 8
12
MODULE
ADDRESS
1
2
3
4
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
6. FOR SPECIFIC SIGNAL DEVICE INFORMATION
REFER TO FENWAL DATA SHEETS 75.XXX
ONLY POLARIZED SIGNALLING DEVICES TO BE USED.
7.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
S - FOR SUPERVISED CIRCUITS
L - FOR POWER LIMITED CIRCUITS
76-100016-001
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Signal Audible Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-006
REVISION
AC
SHEET
1 of 3
8. JUMPERS W9 & W10 MUST BE CUT OUT
WHEN AUXILIARY POWER INPUT IS USED.
9. MAXIMUM OF 8 MODULES PER SYSTEM.
10. MAXIMUM OF ONE #12 AWG WIRE PER TERMINAL.
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
SOUNDER
CIRCUITS
1-4
1
4. MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
SEE NOTE 5
5
6
7
8
12
NOT USED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
I-14
AUXILIARY
POWER
SEE NOTE 4
MODULE ADDRESS ASSIGNMENT
3. SIGNAL OUTPUT REQUIRE THE USE OF END OF LINE
RESISTOR (EOR) - 10K, 0.5W; NOT SUPPLIED WITH
PANEL. AVAILABLE AS PART NO. 06-129520-001
(KIT OF 50).
2 STYLE "Y" AND 1 STYLE "Z"
TB1
TB1
5
L
S
L
10K
CIRCUIT 1
6
-
10K
EOR
EOR
5
-
S
L
S
L
10K
EOR
CIRCUIT 2
7
-
S
10K
EOR
-
+
8
8
+
+
9
9
S
L
10K
10K
EOR
EOR
-
S
-
CIRCUIT 3
10
-
CIRCUIT 4
L
10K
EOR
S
11
+
CIRCUIT 3
10
-
11
+
12
12
+
+
JUMPERS
SWITCHES
JUMPERS
CIRCUIT 2
7
+
L
CIRCUIT 1
6
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
76-100016-001
4 STYLE "Y"
SWITCHES
I-15
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
SW2,1
SW3,2
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
SW2,1
SW3,2
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
AUXILIARY POWER CONNECTION
TB1
+24VDC
RET
1
2
PEGAsys
August 1999
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Signal Audible Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-006
REVISION
AC
SHEET
2 of 3
AUXILIARY
POWER
1 STYLE "Z" AND 2 STYLE "Y"
TB1
TB1
L
S
5
5
-
L
10K
EOR
S
-
CIRCUIT 1
6
10K
EOR
-
7
8
8
+
9
10K
EOR
S
9
CIRCUIT 3
10
L
L
S
10K
EOR
-
-
S
CIRCUIT 3
10
10K
EOR
-
11
11
12
12
+
CIRCUIT 4
+
+
I-16
JUMPERS
-
+
+
L
6
7
+
-
CIRCUIT 1
PEGAsys
August 1999
2 STYLE "Z"
+
SWITCHES
SWITCHES
JUMPERS
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
SW2,1
SW3,2
W1
W2
W3
W4
W5
W6
W7
W8
SW2,1
SW3,2
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
DRAWING No.
06-235443-006
76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
W3
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Signal Audible Module
(PEGAsys)
W2
REVISION
AC
SHEET
3 of 3
W1
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
RELAY
76-10004-001
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Relay Output Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-007
REVISION
AB
SHEET
1 of 1
76-100016-001
I-17
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
CITY TIE
76-100002-001
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-008
REVISION
AB
SHEET
1 of 2
August 1999
I-18
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
City Tie Module
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-008
REVISION
AB
SHEET
2 of 2
76-100016-001
I-19
August 1999
J2
R1
J3
J4
J5
J6
J7
J8
J9
RS-485
Rv2
JP1
Rv1
COM. TBL.
PEGAsys
August 1999
I/O MOTHER BOARD
J1
COM. ALM.
SIG. GND
485A
C
Tb1
485B
RET
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
Tb2
NOTE:
+24V
1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.
2. JUMPER JP1 SHOULD BE IN. MAKE SURE THAT JUMPER
W4 ON POWER SUPPLY CONTROL BOARD IS OUT.
1. POWER CONNECTIONS:1.
1). TB1 BRINGS 24VDC POWER FROM POWER SUPPLY
TB5 OR TB6 TERMINAL BLOCKS.
2). 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1) FROM TB5 OR TB6 ON POWER SUPPLY.
3). TERMINAL TB1 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO I/O MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.
I-20
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
1). J9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES I/O MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
2). J1 THROUGH J8 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN I/O MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC
POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
3). RS232 COMMUNICATIONS FOR RX/TX MODULE TO BE PROVIDED THROUGH PHONE CABLE
PLUGGED INTO "RX/TX" PORT ON CCM.
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Basic I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-011
REVISION
AB
SHEET
1 of 2
76-100016-001
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
4). TB2 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER
SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
PEGAsys
LE
I/O
DU
O
M
/TX E
RXDUL
O
M
TO CCM RX/TX PORT
TO CCM I/O PORT
TO POWER SUPPLY
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Basic I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-011
REVISION
AB
SHEET
2 of 2
76-100016-001
I-21
August 1999
NOTE:
I-22
RET
+24V
+24V
RET
+24V
RET
+24V
+24V
+24V
3. THE FIRST RX/TX MODULE (LOOP #1) SHOULD BE ALWAYS ON
THE FAR RIGHT AND INTERCONNECTED TO JP1 AND TB1. ALL
CONSECUTIVE RX/TX MODULES SHOULD BE PLUGGED FROM
RIGHT TO LEFT STARTING FROM THE FIRST RX/TX.
(CONNECTOR NUMBER IS ASSOCIATED WITH LOOP NUMBER).
2. INSTALL THE W1 JUMPER IF THE MOTHERBOARD IS HOOKED AS THE
LAST DEVICE ON THE RS-485 I/O BUS, REMOVE THE JUMPER OTHERWISE.
3). TERMINAL TB9 CAN BE USED TO BRING POWER TO I/O MODULES IN THE AUXILIARY BOX.
5). TB10 TO BE USED TO INTERCONNECT TO AUXILIARY PANELS' MOTHER BOARD AND POWER
SUPPLIES TO PROVIDE RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
4). J1 THROUGH J7 TO BE USED TO PLUG IN I/O MODULES AND SUPPLY THEM WITH +24VDC
POWER AND RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
3). JP9 CONNECTS TO CCM PORT AND PROVIDES I/O MODULES WITH RS485 COMMUNICATIONS.
2). JP1 THROUGH JP8 TO BE CONNECTED TO RX/TX MODULES' J2 CONNECTORS TO
PROVIDE RS232 COMMUNICATIONS.
1). JP0 CONNECTS TO CCM MODULE AND SUPPLIES RS232 COMMUNICATION FOR RX/TX MODULES.
2. COMMUNICATIONS:
RET
1. USE RED WIRES FOR +24VDC AND BLACK FOR RET.
RET
2). TB1 THROUGH TB8 TO BE USED TO CONNECT 24VDC POWER TO RX/TX MODULES (J1).
1). TB9 AND TB11 BRING 24VDC POWER FROM
POWER SUPPLY TB5 AND TB6.
1. POWER CONNECTIONS:1.
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
RET
August 1999
+24V
RET
RS232
RET
RS485
+24V
485B
485A
SIG. GND
COM. ALM.
COM. TBL.
I/O
MODULES
MULTILOOP CONTROLLER/MOTHERBOARD
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Multi-Loop I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-012
REVISION
AB
SHEET
1 of 2
76-100016-001
+24V
RET
RET
+24V
PEGAsys
L
I/O
DU
MO
E
/TX E
RXDUL
O
M
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Multi-Loop I/0 Motherboard
(PEGAsys)
DRAWING No.
06-235443-012
REVISION
AB
SHEET
2 of 2
76-100016-001
I-23
August 1999
August 1999
I-24
SEE NOTE 3
WATERFLOW
MANUAL PULL STATION
N.O. CONTACT DEVICES
TYPICAL CONFIGURATIONS
PROTECTIVE
COVERING
EOL
GRAY
EOL
BK
RD
N/O
SEE NOTE 1
UL LABEL
WHITE
WH
BN
EOL
TO
REMOTE
LED
TO REMOVE
CONTACT
DEVICE
TO CATHODE
TO ANODE
BROWN
ORANGE
EOL SEE NOTE 3
NOTES
9 SECONDS
2 SECONDS
NO LED PULSING
NORMALLY OPEN
NORMALLY CLOSED
FOR SUPERVISORY USE ONLY
-001
DESCRIPTION
-000
CAT. NO.
9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-407002-00X THRU
70-407004-00X.
8. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION
OF ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE.
7. TYPICAL PULES RATE:
NORMAL:
ALARM:
TROUBLE:
6. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.’S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND
71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX
TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL
DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.
5. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS
STANDBYALARM
380uA
310uA
4. TO REMOTE LED (FENWAL PART NO. 70-410001-000)
OBSERVE POLARITY: ORANGE (ANODE), GRAY (CATHODE)
CAUTION: LED MUST BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS
ADDRESSABLE CONTACT INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL
WIRING ENCLOSED IN CONDUIT AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH
50FT.. LED CIRCUIT IS NOT SUPERVISED.
3. EOL RESISTOR: 820 OHM .5 WATT
(FENWAL PART NO. 06-129025-001)
2. SUPERVISED LINE FOR REMOTE CONTACT DEVICE
CONNECTION. CAUTION: CONTACT DEVICE MUST
BE IN THE SAME ROOM AS ADDRESSABLE CONTACT
INPUT DEVICE, WITH ALL WIRING ENCLOSED IN
CONDUIT, AND A MAXIMUM LENGTH OF 150 FT.
1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER
INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. NO. 30-402001-000)
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO SMART
DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Contact Input Device
NO/NC (Obsolete)
DRAWING No.
06-234563-003
REVISION
BB
SHEET
1 of 1
76-100016-001
76-100016-001
PROTECTIVE
COVERING
N.O.
COM.
N.C.
FIELD
CONNECTION
LED
(SEE NOTE 5)
I-25
BK
SEE NOTES 1 & 9
RD
WHITE ( N/O )
UL LABEL
CAUTION: …
BROWN ( N/C )
ORANGE ( COM )
SEE NOTE 2
NOTES
9 SECONDS
2 SECONDS
NO LED PULSING
9. WIRING INFORMATION SHOWN FOR 70-408002-000 THRU
70-408003-000.
8. MUST BE INSTALLED IN A U.L. LISTED GANG BOX..
7. MOUNTS IN 4“ SQUARE ELECTRICAL BOX.
6. REFER TO SYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL FOR APPLICATION
OF ADDRESSABLE RELAY OUTPUT
5. TYPICAL PULSE RATE:
RELAY RESET (STANDBY):
RELAY SET:
TROUBLE STATE:
4. SMART DETECTOR PRODUCT NO.’S 70-40XXXX-XXX AND
71-40XXXX-XXX MAY BE MIXED ON THE SAME MULTIPLEX
TRUNK CIRCUIT, BUT SHALL NOT EXCEED 255 TOTAL
DEVICES PER CIRCUIT, 2040 PER SYSTEM.
3. MAXIMUM CURRENT REQUIREMENTS:
STANDBY: 325uA
2. RELAY OUTPUTS ARE NOT SUPERVISED.
RATING: 2A, 30 VDC (RESISTIVE)
.6A, 120 VAC (RESISTIVE)
1. RED AND BLACK WIIRES ARE NON-POLERIZED POWER
INPUTS. REFER TO RX/TX (CAT. Number 30-402001-000 &
74-200005-001) WIRING DIAGRAM FOR CONNECTION TO
SMART DETECTOR MULTIPLEX TRUNK CIRCUIT AND
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS.
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
PEGAsys
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device
(Obsolete)
DRAWING No.
06-234563-001
REVISION
BA
SHEET
1 of 1
August 1999
PEGAsys
August 1999
Typical N.O. Initiating
Devices
NOTES
Maximum 25Ω resistance per wire for
initiating circuit. For a total circuit wiring
resistance of 50Ω max.
2.
Terminal connection supports wiring
from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14 AWG
(1.5 mm2)
3.
Refer to Control Panel Manual for
addressable loop wiring specification.
4.
Maximum 10 VDC @ 1 mA.
5.
This module will not support 2-wire
smoke detectors.
6.
N/O initiating device circuit is NFPA
Class B/Style B.
7.
Rating on LED circuit: 26 VDC Max. 7
mA Max. If not used leave terminals
open circuit.
8.
All wiring is power limited and supervised.
9.
The AI, N/C Device is intended for use
within the control equipment providing
the normally closed contact.
10.
The initiating device and remote LED
annunciator (if used) must be located in
the same room as the AI.
11.
Use Listed 10K Ohm end-of-line resistor,
P/N 06-129025-003.
See Notes: 1, 2, and 4
See Note 3
(+)
PC Line
In
(+)
(-)
PC Line
Out
(-)
EOL
(Listed 10KΩ Resistor)
Typical N.C. Supervisory
Devices
See Note 3
I-26
Remote LED
(Optional)
See Note 7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
3
4
5
6
7
8
ALL TERMINALS ARE POWER LIMITED
2
SmartOne TM
1
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
A B (+) (-)
MODEL AI, N/O
CAT. NO. 70-407008-001
SEE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235578-001
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
PC PC PC PC SW SW LED LED
(+) (-) (+) (-)
A B (+) (-)
76-100016-001
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Contact Input Device
NO/NC
DRAWING No.
New Design
REVISION
-
SHEET
1 of 1
AI, N/O
EOL
(Listed 10KΩ Resistor)
AI, N/C
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
1.
7
COM
Field
Connections
6
N/C
5
See Note 3
PC Line
In
NOTES
See Note 3
(+)
(+)
(-)
(-)
I-27
AO must be installed in the same
room as the device it is controlling .
2.
Terminal connection supports wiring
from #18 AWG (0.75 mm2) to #14
AWG (1.5 mm2)
3.
Refer to Control Panel Manual for
addressable loop wiring specification.
4.
PC Line wiring is power limited and
supervised.
1
2
3
4
TERMINALS 1-4 ARE POWER LIMITED
TERMINALS 5-7 ARE POWER LIMITED
5
6
7
N/C COM N/O
MODEL AO
CAT. NO. 70-408004-001
SEE INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
06-235577-001
MAX. INSTALL. TEMP. 120°F
FOR SERVICE SEND TO:
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
400 MAIN ST.
ASHLAND, MA 01721
DATE OF MANUFACTURE:
PC PC PC PC
(+) (-) (+) (-)
PEGAsys
August 1999
TITLE
Installation Wiring Diagram
Addressable Relay Output Device
DRAWING No.
New Design
REVISION
-
SHEET
1 of 1
SmartOne TM
PC Line
Out
1.
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
76-100016-001
N/O
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
I-28
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX J
PEGAsys NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
J-1
Note that it is not possible to download configuration information to all the NICs on a network simultaneously. Each NIC (node)
must be configured independently.
INTRODUCTION
The PEGAsys Network Interface Card (NIC) provides the capability for peer-to-peer communication between PEGAsys fire/
suppression control panels (nodes). The NIC mounts as a
daughter card on the PEGAsys Central Control Module (CCM).
Up to 32 nodes may be networked to form groups. Groups are
numbered logical groupings that delineate the extended coverage area and simplify programming.
The operator can set network configuration options on the
PEGAsys(s) in three ways:
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2
DS4
DS2
DS3
DS1
N2
N1
I2
I1
B1IA1
Via the keypad on the Central Control Module.
•
Via PCS.
•
Via a “dumb terminal.”
Below are the network options which can be configured for each
node and which are stored in that panel's memory. Paragraphs
detailing each option follow.
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD
CAT. NO. 74-200036-001
J1
•
•
Network Style: None, Single-Channel (Style 4),
or Redundant Channel (Style 7).
•
Node number: 0 to 32
•
Network group number: 0 to 32
•
Processing of network RESET messages:
Enabled/Disabled
•
Processing of network SILENCE messages:
Enabled/Disabled
•
Logging all events: Enabled/Disabled.
•
Time resynchronization (resynch) period
•
Central Station
C26
1
TB3
K2
CR1
TB1
U12
K1
K3
RV11
U11
R46
C12
R45
+5
U2
1
C23
C20
C4
+
C3
TP3
TP4
C13
TP5
C5
Q4
C8
R42
Q1 1
1
C7
U6
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
C2
C14
J-2.1.1 NETWORK STYLE
C25
U10
U9
Both of the two independent data channels can be enabled (Style
7), or either one of the channels can be disabled (Style 4). These
data channels transmit network information from one node to
the next, or bi-directionally if nodes are connected on either
side of the transmitting node. In Style-7 configuration, data transfer is redundant so that if there is a failure on one channel, or its
cable, the other channel will maintain communication.
R19
R29
R34
R33
R32
C22
C1
U16
U17
U8
1
1
R26
R18
R38
R31
R28
R27
ASHLAND, MA 01721
1
+
Q2
U15
R7
Q3
1
I2
1
R12
R17
R1
N2
U4
C16 1
R44
1
C9
C11
U5
N1
TP6
1
U3
1
U21
1
U14
C10
R43
U20
1
U19
R13
1
R41
R40
R2
R36
C18
1
R21
U18
R20
R14
1
R22
TP1
TP2
I1
Y1
R10
+
U7
E2
E5
E6
R3
RV1
R4
RV7
E3
RV5
E4
RV3
R5
RV9
R6
GND
RV2
RV4
E7
R25
RV8
E1
RV6
R24
E8
1
K4
RV10
RV12
R23
C27
U13
R15
TB2
+
CR2
CR3
TB4
D
C17
C15
C24
Figure J-1. Network Interface Card (NIC)
J-2.1.2 NODE NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
Each PEGAsys control panel which is a network node (i.e.,
equipped with a NIC) may be assigned to a designated network
group (numbered 1 through 32) or to network group 0. When
an event occurs at a node, notification of the particular alarm,
trouble, abort, etc., will be delivered to each of the other nodes
on the network in the form of a message.
Nodes may be assigned a number from 0 to 32. Number 0 (the
default) means that the node does not participate in any network activity. Any assignment from 1 to 32 means that the node
actively participates in all pre-configured network activity.
J-2.1.3 NETWORK GROUP NUMBER ASSIGNMENT
J-2
CONFIGURATION/ADDRESSING
J-2.1
Overview
Nodes may be assigned to groups 0 through 32. A node assigned to network group 0 receives and processes messages
received from all nodes only if configured to “Log All Events”. A
node assigned to groups 1 through 32 will process only those
messages from nodes in the same network group unless configured to “Log All (Network) groups ”.
Each node can be configured independently using any of the
three methods described in the following paragraphs. The configuration process is dealt with in more detail in the PEGAsys
Configuration Software (PCS) Program User's Guide (76-014),
which should be referred to.
76-100016-001
J-2.1.4 RESET ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling RESET on a node means that it can be reset from any
other node in its group. If it is assigned to network group 0, it
can be reset from any node on the network.
J-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
J-2.1.5 SILENCE ENABLE/DISABLE
J-2.1.8 CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
Enabling SILENCE on a node means that it can be silenced
from any other node in its group. If it is assigned to network
group 0, it can be silenced from any node on the network.
A node can be configured as a central station if that node is
properly connected to a Silent Knight DACT, Model 5104. Central Station configuration automatically forces that node to ‘Log
All Events’ and also MP04, a volt-free relay on the CCM, is configured to activate on any alarm on any node in the network.
J-2.1.6 EVENT LOGGING ENABLE/DISABLE
Enabling “Log All Events” causes all network events to be logged
at this node. This includes the receipt of an ACKNOWLEDGE
from a button on a remote node. Disabling will result in logging
events only in it’s own (non-zero) group.
J-2.2
Configuring Networking Options
via the Display/Keypad
Configuration can be performed through the system menus,
accessible using a panel’s built-in membrane keypad and LCD
display panel. The software will initially use default values, with
networking style set to “None” until changed by an operator.
J-2.1.7 TIME RESYNCHRONIZATION PERIOD
(SET IN MINUTES)
A time-resynchronization message is broadcast on the network at
intervals determined by the resynch period. If a node does not
receive a resynchronization message during this interval, it uses
its network connection to ask for the time, or uses its own locally
stored time if its query does not result in a resynch message.
J-2.2
PEGAsys Panel Network Menus
The menu structure of the PEGAsys has been upgraded to
accommodate network configuration. All of the network options
listed in Paragraph J-2.1 are configurable via the front panel
3. SET
1. TIME:DATE
2. PRINTER
3. DEVICES
4. PROGRAMMING
5. DCC's
7. CLEAR EVENTS
7. NETWORK
9.CLR RMT EVENTS
REMOVE QUEUED EVENTS RECIEVED FROM NODE #___
1. STYLE
CH1: ENABLE/DISABLE
2. NODE NUMBER
NODE NUMBER ( 1 TO 64)
0: STAND ALONE
GROUP NUMBER ( 1 TO 64)
0: NOT GROUPD
3. GROUP
CH2: ENABLE/DISABLE
4. ADD/RMV NODES
ADD OR REMOVE NODE#__ TO NODE# __
5. RESET EVENT
ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK RESET
6. SILENCE EVENTS
ENABLE/DISABLE NETWORK SILENCE
7. LOG EVENTS
LOG ALL GROUP OR ONLY NETWORK EVENTS
8. RESYNC PERIOD
SET RESYNC: 0(off) OR 1-60000 MIN
9. ISOLATE
1:ISOLATE NODE 2:DE-ISOLATE NODE
Figure J-2. Network Menu
August 1999
J-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Table J-1. Network Configuration Table
Remote Node Location
ACK
SILENCE
RESET
LOG EVENT S/EOC/RT S
If a node is in a non-zero group, it will accept button pushes and events from remote nodes if configured as shown
below:
All nodes in group 0
L
SE, L
RE, L
L
All nodes in same group
Yes
SE
RE
Yes
All nodes in different groups
L
SE, L
RE, L
L
If a node is in group 0, it will accept button pushes and events from remote nodes if configured as shown below:
All nodes in all groups
L
SE, L
RE, L
L
L: If node is configured to "Log All Groups."
SE: If node is configured for remote SILENCE Enable.
RE: If node is configured for remote RESET Enable
gram. The ACKNOWLEDGE function will be automatic, the
SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the
panel’s membrane keypad and LCD display panel.
membrane keypad. In addition, the menu provides the ability to
add or remove individual or groups of nodes to/from the network. The additions to the PEGAsys menu structure are diagramed in Figure J-2.
J-2.3
Configuring Networking Options via PCS
•
A node in a different non-zero network group configured to
log all groups will process network message(s) from any
node in the entire network, depending on its own installed
program. ACKNOWLEDGE is automatic, however SILENCE and RESET functions must be enabled in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS), or by using the panel’s
membrane keypad and LCD display panel.
•
A node in network group zero, the default group, will not be
recognized by any other nodes in network group zero for
functions other than receiving messages unless it is configured to log all groups in PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS).
Configuration of all CCM parameters, including network parameters, can be accomplished using PCS. The software will initially use default values, with networking Style set to “None”
until changed by an operator.
See the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program User's
Guide (76-014) for details.
J-2.4
Configuring Networking Options
via a “Dumb Terminal”
Refer to Table J-1 for a summary of these relationships.
Control panel configuration can be performed through use of
the system menus using a “dumb terminal” attached to the serial “PC Port.” The software will initially use default values, with
networking style set to “None” until changed by an operator.
•
NOTE: Menus cannot be accessed with an alarm
condition in effect.
J-3
J-4
OPERATION
Whether they are assigned to network group 0 or to groups
1 through 32,
•
Whether they are communicating
panels in their local group,
•
Or with panels in a remote group.
with
other
Central Control Module (CCM) CPU Board
•
Network Interface Card (NIC)
•
Network Wiring
Central Control Module CPU Board
The CCM board is a slightly modified version of the original
CPU board designed so that the NIC will plug in as a daughter
board. This modification has no effect on normal operation of
the PEGAsys panel or system.
J-4.2
A node which receives the network message from another
node in the same non-zero group, will process the network
message appropriately, depending on its own installed pro-
76-100016-001
•
J-4.1
Table J-1 sets forth these relationships. In more detail, however:
•
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
This section describes the hardware used to implement the
PEGAsys Network:
Networked PEGAsys panels may be configured to communicate differently depending on
•
Nodes can be added or deleted from network only via Network Menu.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
The NIC contains the hardware necessary for data-communication between network nodes. The channel is an EIA-485 bus
J-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
•
Dual Channel Support
without power will not participate in networking, this pass-through
function allows all other network nodes to function normally while
providing the proper trouble indications.
•
Messaging
•
Repeater
J-4.2.5 ISOLATION
•
Fail Safe
•
Isolation
line. Each node uses one (1) NIC. The NIC performs the following functions:
One half of each channel is an isolated, floating RS-485 transceiver and the other half is a non-isolated, grounded RS-485
transceiver. This assures that the chassis of any two nodes are
physically disconnected, eliminating the possibility of groundloop current, while retaining the ability to detect ground faults.
J-4.3
ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM
Hardware
Repeater
Logic
TA1
TB1
Rx out
TA2
The panels are networked by attaching two twisted, shieldedpair cables between the appropriate NICs. The node-to-node
wire must not exceed a length of 4000 ft. and must be AWG 18
or heavier gauge. Under adverse conditions (for example, high
electrical noise) shielded twisted pairs may be required. Connect panels together as shown in Figure J-4.
NON-ISOLATED
NETWORK MEDIUM
TB2
Rx/Tx Selection
Logic
Rx out
Tx in
Tx in
Driver
Enable
Driver
Enable
Network Wiring
Channel 2
Note B
RTS Rx
Channel 1
Tx
Note A
1/2
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2
NETWORK INTERFACE CARD (NIC)
B1IA1
B2NA2 B1NA1 B2IA2 B1IA1
To CCM CPU
Figure J-3. NIC Block Diagram
(Shown With Power To NIC Lost)
NETWORK
INTERFACE
CARD
NETWORK
INTERFACE
CARD
J-4.2.1 DUAL CHANNEL SUPPORT
CCM CPU BOARD
PEGAsys PANEL
The NIC optionally supports operation of Style-4 or Style-7 channels. Under normal operation with Style 7, network communication is divided between the two channels. In case of a short
circuit or a break in any of the connecting wires, either channel
by itself can execute all network communications, although
somewhat more slowly than if both channels are in operation.
CCM CPU BOARD
PEGAsys PANEL
Note A: Attach the shields on the 'N' side of the network line to the grounding screw on the CCM.
Note B: The shields on the 'I' side of the network line are to be cut short and left floating.
Note C: All circuits are supervised and power limited.
Figure J-4. Network Wiring
J-4.2.2 MESSAGING
J-5
When a node wishes to transmit over a network channel, the
data is written to the NIC which sends the signals out to the bus
for receipt by remote NICs. While a node is not transmitting
data, the NIC reads the bus data traffic, and converts it to a
form readable by the node’s software. Data communication will
be configured on the NIC’s UART as 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
(8-N-1), and 9600 baud. The NIC will either transmit locally produced data or receive and retransmit bus activity as a repeater.
MAINTENANCE AND/OR REPLACEMENT
No maintenance is required. In the event of failure, the module
should be returned to the factory for repair or replacement.
J-4.2.3 REPEATER (TRANSCEIVER)
The NIC acts as a repeater, regenerating bus information as it
moves through the NIC. Its bidirectional repeater function is
implemented completely in hardware; no software is needed to
control this process. The transceiver’s transmit and receive
switching (in half-duplex mode) is also performed automatically
by hardware.
J-4.2.4 FAIL SAFE
If a power failure occurs in a node, the NIC includes a normally
closed (NC) relay which maintains the communications integrity of the network. When the NIC loses power, the relay passes
the network signals directly through the board. While the node
August 1999
J-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Description
Part Number
NOTE: For proper network configuration it is necessary to use
version 7.X of PCS, PEGAsys Configuration Software.
For complete information on this aspect of installation
see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program User’s Guide (P/N 06-235766-001). As of this
date, version 7.X of PCS is required for proper configuration.
Network Interface Card (NIC)
74-200036-500
J-7.2
Snap-in Nylon Standoff, 3/4-in.
06-118142-001
Some or all of the following tools will be required to perform
removal and installation.
8-32 Theadless Brass
Standoff, Nickel plated
06-118143-001
1.
Small flat-blade screwdriver.
2.
6" flat-blade screwdriver.
8-32 x 1-1/4-in.
Screw with Washer
06-250116-030
Installation Sheet
06-235848-001
J-6
PARTS LIST
The NIC Installation Kit (P/N 76-100036-500) consists of the
following:
J-7
No. 2 Philips screwdriver.
4.
Wire striper.
5.
Small needle nose pliers.
6.
Ground strap (wrist strap) for ESD protection.
7.
IC chip extraction tool.
For full Style-7 operation, two twisted pair cables must connect
each pair of panels, as shown in Figure J-4. Single-channel
operation (using only one twisted pair cable between NICs) is
possible and provides Style-4 operation. With single-channel
operation, an open circuit on any network wire will effectively
break the network into two separate peer-to-peer networks, both
functional and both reporting troubles.
J-7.4
Removing And Replacing A Complete CCM
Module
The old CCM module can removed as a whole and replaced
with a new module. The following provides the procedure for
removing the and replacing a complete CCM module
NIC Installation
1.
Ensure that all programming is saved using PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS). For the proper procedure, see
the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program User’s
Guide (P/N 06-235766-001).
2.
Ensure that the power supply EPROM is of a version compatible with PEGAsys networking. See Note above.
3.
Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.
4.
Disconnect plugs from the I/O Port and Rx/Tx port, and
P.C. port. Make note of each wire and cable connection for
use during reassembly
CAUTION
PEGAsys system installation applications require
that when a NIC is installed, pre-discharge and
release-state activation, as well as abort-state
activation are limited to the originating fire-alarm
control panel.
NOTE: Determine whether you have a newer or older CCM; a
new CCM can be recognized by a single-line 20 pin
header on the top edge on right side of board. If the
networking upgrade is for an older system, the new
CCM and Network Interface Card (NIC) will be separate. First replace the old CCM with the new CCM and
then install the NIC. See following instructions for NIC
installation.
5.
Remove the remaining wiring from CCM panel.
6.
Remove the six mounting screws while holding the CCM
assembly in place.
7.
Remove CCM assembly from cabinet.
8.
Remove new CCM assembly from packing and inspect for
physical damage. If undamaged...
9.
Install new CCM in the reverse order of removal making
sure that each wire and cable is properly reconnected.
CAUTION
Many electronic components are subject to damage
from electrostatic discharge (ESD). These
components are not to be removed from their
protective wrappings until they are to be installed
in their respective equipment locations, and then
only by personnel connected to earth ground.
76-100016-001
Central Control Module.
The PEGAsys panel will be delivered with a separate network
interface card; some existing panels can also can be retrofitted
with a network interface card. Following are instructions both
for replacement of complete CCM modules, and for installing a
NIC in an existing CCM module. The CCM module consists of
both the CPU panel and its attached LCD display and keypad
assembly.
The NIC is installed as a daughter board to the CCM board.
After this is accomplished, the panels are wired together using
twisted, shielded-pair cable, AWG-18 or heavier. Shielded
twisted pair is recommended to reduce interference caused by
electrical noise in the vicinity of the wires.
J-7.1
3.
J-7.3
INSTALLATION
Required Tools
10. Reinstall programming and configure the network using
PCS. See J-2.
J-5
August 1999
PEGAsys
J-7.5
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
Installing a NIC in an existing CCM Module
J-8
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
1.
Ensure that all programming is saved using PCS software.
2.
Put on a properly grounded ESD-protective wrist strap.
3.
Remove power from panel but be sure the chassis remains
grounded.
4.
Remove 4 nylon screws holding membrane keypad and
remove membrane by pulling it straight out of its connector.
J-9
5.
Remove the 6 threaded spacers that secure the display
electronics board and lift board out. Do not disconnect board
- let it hang down. Data and power lines will remain connected.
Testing is a function of the PEGAsys system in which the NIC is
installed. No local test functions exist. For more information on
testing the NIC and the network, see the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program User's Guide.
6.
Insert the three plastic standoffs that were included with
the NIC into the holes shown in Fig J-5.
7.
Carefully plug the NIC into the 20-pin receptacle and onto
the plastic standoffs.
8.
Secure upper right corner of NIC with long screw and
spacer. Spacer will separate NIC and the CCM board and
screw will go through to the panel.
9.
The NIC is powered by the panel to which it is attached via the
CCM board. No other power connections are required.
J-10
Replace the display electronics board and reattach the 6
threaded spacers.
TESTING
SPECIFICATIONS
Input Voltage
24 VDC
Supervisory Current
50 mA max.
Alarm Current
50 mA max.
10. Carefully plug in the membrane keypad and attach the 4
screws. Make sure pins and receptacle are properly aligned.
11. Attach network wiring as previously described.
12. Reinstall programming and configure the network using
PCS. See J-2.
20-PIN RECEPTACLE
FOR NIC
LONG SCREW
AND SPACER
THROUGH HERE
INSERT PLASTIC
STANDOFFS HERE
DISPLAY PORT
RX/TX
PORT
P.C. PORT
I/O PORT
Rx/Tx PORT
I/O
PORT
PRINT PORT
DISP
PORT
PRINT
PORT
P.C.
PORT
Figure J-5. CCM Board Showing
NIC Attachment Points
J-7.6
Replacing Firmware Chips
For complete instructions, see PEGAsys Firmware Upgrade
datasheet (P/N 06-235763-001). This document covers the CCM
EPROM. Be sure to follow ESD prevention procedures.
August 1999
J-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX K
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE
K-1
INTRODUCTION
K-3
The SmartOne™ Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) is
an intelligent field device that contains its own microprocessor,
4K of memory, and all necessary electronics to provide standard
notification or audio output. Connection is via the SmartOneTM compatible control panel’s power/communication line. This component is a UL Listed field device.
Once installed and configured, the ASM requires little or no maintenance. The module's 24 VDC or 25/70 VAC modes can be
changed from the factory defaults using switch S1 and jumper P1
(See Figure K-1).
The ASM can be individually field programmed via hardware to
support notification appliances and NFPA Style Y (Class B) or
Style Z (Class A) operation. See Figure K-2 for audio/auxiliary
notification appliance switch and jumper selections, and NFPA
operation Style Y/Z terminal selections.
K-4
•
For installation details and complete electrical and mechanical
specifications, see the ASM Installation Data Sheet (P/N 06235717-001).
A
B
A
B
PC LINE
KIDDE-FENWAL, INC.
ASHLAND, MA 01721 U.S.A.
CAT. NO. 70-200200-001
INSTRUCTIONS P/N 06-235717-001
PC LINE TERMINALS - POWER LIMITED
ALL OTHERS - POWER LIMITED
TM
AUX. IN
AUDIO
MODE
P1=1&2
S1=3 ON
+ -
TROUBLE
CKT.
OUTPUT CKT.
+ -
-
+
Connections to loop voltage and communications
•
Internal power supply
•
Auxiliary power supply connections and status
•
Memory status
UL
R
FM
K-5
APPROVED
MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The ASM is shipped from the factory as an assembled component and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is required.
Figure K-1. ASM Front Panel
K-2
•
A status LED is mounted on the unit and indicates the output circuit status by a 2 second (active) or 9 second (normal) flash interval. A trouble condition inhibits the status LED completely.
ADDRESSABLE SIGNAL/SOUNDER MODULE (ASM)
+ -
Alarm contact position
The output circuit is monitored by reverse polarity and will not
actuate into a short. If the circuit has a ground fault, open, short or
a relay contact failure, the device will transmit a specific trouble
status.
DEVICE
ADDRESS # _ _ _ _
AUX./AUDIO MODE
SETTINGS
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The SmartOne™ Addressable Signal/Sounder Module (ASM) provides a fully supervised remote-output circuit for connection to
either 24 VDC audible/visual notification signaling devices or 25/
70.7 V RMS speakers. The module provides continuous internal
supervision of:
NOTE: The ASM is not intended to be used as a releasing device
and is not compatible with solenoids or squibs.
AUXILIARY
MODE
P1=2&3
S1=1&2 ON
OPERATION
Testing is accomplished through the testing capabilities of the
PEGAsys panel. See Chapter 5, Troubleshooting and Corrective
Maintenance, for particulars. In the event of a failure, the module
should be replaced.
ADDRESSING AND REGISTRATION
As with any SmartOne loop device, addressing is through the
Kidde hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) or the PEGAsys control panel menu/keypad as described in Chapter 2 of this
manual.
For replacement, follow the instructions in the ASM Installation
Data Sheet.
Module-programmable parameters include owner’s-location message, non-silenceable (waterflow), walk test, drill mode and silence. The programming process is described in PEGAsys™
Configuration Software (PCS) Program User’s Guide, 76-014, (P/
N 06-235766-001).
Addressing and programming the module's registration into the
PEGAsys system is described in Paragraph 2-8 (and sub-paragraphs) of this manual. Registration of the module at the PEGAsys panel is mandatory to ensure proper operation.
76-100016-001
K-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
K-6
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
K-7.2
PARTS LIST
Output Circuit Characteristics
Output Circuit Rating
The following parts are required for installation and operation. All
are supplied with the ASM.
2.0 A max. @ 30.0 VDC
•
Addressable Signal/Sounder Module
P/N 70-200200-001
20.0 W @ 70.7 V RMS
•
Front Cover Plate
P/N 06235714-001
•
End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 4.7 K Ohms, 1/2 W
P/N 06-250166-452
•
End-of-Line (EOL) Resistor, 47 K Ohms, 1/2 W
P/N 06-250166-596
•
Installation Data Sheet, P/N 06-235717-001
K-7
20.0 W @ 25.0 V RMS
Maximum Line Resistances
(with 12 AWG wire)
INSTALLATION
Refer to Figure K-2 and to the ASM Installation Instruction Data
Sheet.
K-7.1
Installation Notes
*
Load
(amps)
Resistance
(ohms)
Length
(feet)*
0.22
20.0
12.0k
0.55
8.0
5.0k
1.00
4.0
2.5k
1.50
2.7
0.6k
2.00
2.0
1.2k
Consider total line lengths from module to field and return.
The ASM single printed circuit board is intended for indoor use
and can be mounted in a North American 4-11/16" electrical box,
or 4" square 2-1/8" deep box. The module terminal block will accept #12, #14, #16 and #18 AWG wire (4.0 mm2, 2.5 mm2, 1.5
mm2 & 1.0 mm2 respectively). Size #18 AWG being a minimum
requirement. The use of solid wire and an extension ring is recommended.
Strip 1/4" from the ends of all wires that connect to the terminal
block of the module.
1/4“ (6.4mm) NTS
CAUTION
Exposing more than 1/4” of wire may cause a ground
fault. Exposing less than 1/4” of wire may result in a
faulty connection.
Refer to the National Electrical Code for proper box specifications. ASM volume is 8.94 cubic-inches.
Refer to the RX/TX specifications in the chapters on Operation,
and Functional Description for addressable-loop wiring specifications.
Power/Communication (PC) line wiring is power limited and supervised. For power-limited circuits, use Type FPL, FPLR, or FPLP
cable per Article 760 of the National Electrical Code (NEC).
The note located on the module's product label (ALL OTHERSPOWER LIMITED) must be removed if the module is connected
to a non-power limited supply source.
If the auxiliary notification appliance power source is not power
limited, the output circuit, auxiliary input circuit, and the trouble
circuit are non-power limited. Otherwise, all three circuits are
power limited.
Supervision of audio to ASM must be provided by the audio equipment. Power limited or non-power limited amplifier outputs are
available.
August 1999
K-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX L
REMOTE DISPLAY CONTROL MODULE
AND REMOTE DISPLAY MODULE
L-1
as the maximum quantity for each module is not exceeded. The
RDCM, in addition to emulation of the PEGAsys LEDs and LCD
displays, provides remote access to the system and, if programmed, the PEGAsys network panel(s) and menu options
via this emulation of the PEGAsys front panel function and numeric keys.
INTRODUCTION
This manual contains the information necessary to support the
PEGAsys Remote Display Control Module (RDCM)(Figure L-1),
P/N 76-300000-502, and Remote Display Module (RDM)(Figure
L-2), P/N 76-300000-501. Both modules function as remote addressable adjuncts to the PEGAsys and mimic the main control
panel’s LCD and LED front displays. Additionally, the RDCM contains system control switches and a tactile response numeric keypad. These controls match the PEGAsys layout. The RDM does
not permit operation of the control features (operation is “read only”).
The RDCM is key and password secured with the password needed
being the one used on the associated PEGAsys panel.
Remote power is required and can be provided by the control
panel PSU or a separate supply UL listed for fire alarm application. In each instance, remote power is supervised by the RDCM
and RDM with failure displayed locally and at the control panel.
The units also contain a buzzer with sequencing that follows
the buzzer contained in the control panel.
Either the PEGAsys control panel or one RDCM can be programmed as the master unit to control the system under alarm
or fault conditions. Operation of an alternate (non-master) unit
will grant that module exclusive control over the system for 30
seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout display message on the module attempting the interrupt. This acts to prevent conflicting
inputs. Under all circumstances, the master will be granted immediate system control.
System Status Display
AC POWER
SYSTEM TROUBLE
ALARM
SUPERVISORY
PRE-ALARM
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
SCROLL
SILENCE
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
L-2.1
All operator interfaces are contained in the front panel assembly. Operator inputs are passed to the PEGAsys for processing.
Figure L-1. RDCM Front Panel
The RDCM operator-interface function keys are:
System Status Display
AC POWER
SYSTEM TROUBLE
ALARM
SUPERVISORY
PRE-ALARM
SILENCE
SCROLL
Acknowledge: Acknowledge alarms/troubles and silence
all local buzzers.
•
Silence: Silence signal/audibles after Acknowledge.
•
Reset: Reset latched alarm conditions.
•
Scroll: Review active alarms/troubles.
The RDCM operator interface needed to enter the password
and access the PEGAsys menu is provided via the alphanumeric keypad:
Figure L-2. RDM Front Panel
Module installers must be fully factory trained in all aspects of
the PEGAsys system. Additional supporting documentation is
also contained in this manual and in the PEGAsys™ Configuration Software (PCS) Program, User’s Guide 76-014, P/N 06235766-001.
•
0 - 9: Used to enter digits to access PEGAsys menus.
•
Delete: Used to exit menu and correct entries.
•
Enter: Used when selecting from PEGAsys menus.
NOTE: Operation of above keys will be hereinafter described.
The RDCM and RDM operator interface status LEDs for monitoring the PEGAsys and remote modules are:
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The RDCM and RDM communicate with the PEGAsys via an
RS-485 interface (one pair #18 AWG, twisted/shielded wire) in
a multi-drop configuration capable of supporting up to 15 RDCM
display/control and 16 RDM display only modules. The installation can be in any combination of RDCM/RDM modules so long
76-100016-001
•
NOTE: Drill operation is available through the PEGAsys
menu.
R
L-2
Operator Interface
L-1
•
Alarm: Indicates an alarm condition.
•
Trouble: Indicates a trouble condition.
•
Silence: Indicates PEGAsys signal/audibles have been
silenced after Acknowledge.
•
Supervisory: Indicates a supervisory condition.
•
Power-on: Indicates the system is receiving AC power.
•
Pre-alarm: Indicates a smoke or thermal detector is in preAugust 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
alarm condition.
•
L-3
CPU fail: Mounted on main PCB and available to the installer only. Indicates RDCM/RDM processor has failed to
initialize.
Before proceeding with operations, please become totally familiar with PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System
manual, especially the sections on Active Alarm Mode, Active
Supervisory Trouble Mode, and Active Trouble Mode. Please
note differences between latching and non-latching Active Alarm
Modes.
LED colors used to represent indications are:
•
Red: Alarm.
•
Green: Power-on.
•
Yellow: CPU failure, trouble, silence, supervisory and prealarm.
For RX/TX loop input devices. To set either latching or nonlatching, please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software
(PCS) manual, PCS Operations chapter.
The RDM functions as read only. Therefore, it has a scroll key,
but does not provide the other function keys nor an operable
keypad.
L-2.2
The following example is for latching alarm mode (for these
examples, assume the device to be manual release, address
1004).
Interconnection
In Normal Standby Mode, the display will show:
The RDCM and RDM operate on a shared RS-485 bus which
supports wire runs of up to 4000 ft. from the PEGAsys control
panel. The primary RS-485 bus from the PEGAsys will support
up to 15 RDCMs and 16 RDMs in any combination not exceeding maximum of each module.
L-2.3
OPERATION
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 06-08-99
PEGASYS
In practice, the actual local time and date will be presented.
When a RX/TX loop device goes into active alarm, the display
will show:
Addressing
1004 ALARM ON - MANUAL RELEASE
Address selection is via setting of the 16-way, 4-bit hexadecimal coded rotary switch, SW1, mounted on the printed circuit
board. See Figure L-4.
Default or user text
L-3.1
Table L-1. Address Switch Settings
Switch Functions
The switch functions are listed in sequence of use:
Switch
Setting
RDM/RDCM
Address
Switch
Setting
RDM/RDCM
Address
1
RDM or RDCM 01
9
RDM or RDCM 09
2
RDM or RDCM 02
A
RDM or RDCM 10
3
RDM or RDCM 03
B
RDM or RDCM 11
4
RDM or RDCM 04
C
RDM or RDCM 12
5
RDM or RDCM 05
D
RDM or RDCM 13
6
RDM or RDCM 06
E
RDM or RDCM 14
7
RDM or RDCM 07
F
RDM or RDCM 15
8
RDM or RDCM 08
0
RDM 16
PEGAsys
All ALARM ON, ALARM OFF, TROUBLE ON/OFF, or SUPERVISORY ON/OFF messages must be acknowledged by operation of this switch. Multiple alarms must be individually
acknowledged, all other multiple inputs will default to individual
acknowledge, but may be programmed to global acknowledge
by accessing the “SET" menu from the PEGAsys or any RDCM.
The RDCM will pass the acknowledge input to the PEGAsys
causing its LED to go from a pulsing to a steady mode, and the
buzzer to silence.
The PEGAsys sends a global command to silence all remote
RDCM/RDM buzzers.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the
system for 30 seconds. Under these conditions, attempts to input from another module will prompt a lockout display message
(See Paragraph L-3.1.2 for example) on the module attempting
the interrupt to prevent conflicting inputs. Under all circum-
TWISTED SHIELDED CABLE TO CHASSIS/EARTH GROUND.
POWER SUPPLY
AUX.
24V
DCM ASSEMBLY
TB1
PINS
1
2
+
5
6
7
8
TB1 PINS
76-100016-001
L-3.1.1 ACKNOWLEDGE
PINS 3 & 4 ARE
TIED TOGETHER WHEN
USING THE PANELS
POWER SUPPLY
RDCM/RDM
ASSEMBLY
IN
OUT
6 5
3
4
7
8
RDCM/RDM
ASSEMBLY
IN
3 4
TB1 PINS
5
6
UP TO 31
REMOTE
DEVICES
1
2
TB1 PINS
AUX. SUPPLY
+
- 24V
(IF REQ'D.)
TO TROUBLE
CONTACTS
CLOSED = NORMAL
OPERATION
PIN 1 OF TB1 IS AT TOP OF CONNECTOR
NOTE: ALL CIRCUITS ARE SUPERVISED AND POWER LIMITED
Figure L-3. Interconnection of PEGAsys panel, RDM, RDCM(s)
August 1999
L-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
NO ACTIVE ALARM REMAINS
stances, the module (or control panel) programmed as the system master will be granted immediate system control.
Now, operation of the “reset” switch will have the following results:
The display at the calling device will then show:
The RDCM will pass the reset input to the PEGAsys causing all
conditions programmed to cancel on reset to de-energize.
1004 ALARM ON ACK - MANUAL RELEASE
Default or user text
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCMs. This gives the calling device exclusive control over the
system for 30 seconds and displays the following message:
(The default or user text is that entered at the associated PEGAsys panel. This message cannot be changed from the
RDCM.)
SYSTEM RESET
Then the display will show how many active alarms are still
present in the system (if any), and subsequently display how
many active trouble conditions are still present in the system (if
any). For example:
If there are no further key entries at the calling device (address
02), and no further system events are detected, all modules
and the PEGAsys will display the system default message:
001
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00AM 03-08-99
ACTIVE ALARMS REMAINING
PEGASYS
Again in the case of multiple alarms (either On or Off), each
event must be acknowledged separately. In the case of multiple troubles, actuation of the acknowledge input may be separate or programmed to global acknowledge. A maximum of 32
trouble message can be displayed/scrolled at any one time.
In practice, the actual local time and date will be presented.
In the event of an RDCM's microprocessor going into fault condition, actuation of hardware switch S3 located behind the display membrane will cause a hardware reset of the
microprocessor.
For non-latching sequence, each ALARM OFF will display and
must be acknowledged.
L-3.1.4 SCROLL
1004 ALARM OFF - MANUAL RELEASE
When the “Scroll” key is pressed during any active system event,
the following will result:
Default or user text
In the event of loss of communications between the RDCM and
the PEGAsys on the RS-485 bus, the local buzzer will sound
and the trouble LED will light.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCM(s). This gives the calling device (address 02) exclusive
control over the system as described in “reset” above.
L-3.1.2 SILENCE
NOTE: The RDM scroll key does not provide the global lockout command.
When all alarm and trouble conditions have been acknowledged,
operation of the “silence” switch will have the following results:
The PEGAsys, RDCMs and RDMs will then be updated by the
next event in the buffer.
The RDCM will pass the silence input to the PEGAsys causing
all outputs programmed for silence to de-energize.
When a “Scroll” key is actuated at any RDCM, RDM or the PEGAsys, the resulting scroll display is sent globally to the system.
The PEGAsys sends out a global lockout command to all other
RDCM(s). This gives the calling device exclusive control over
the system for 30 seconds. For these examples, assume RDCM
address 02. If another (non-master) module attempts an interrupt, the following lockout message will display for 5 seconds:
•
LED Test Feature: With no active inputs, press and hold
the “scroll” key for 2 seconds. All LEDs will light for 5 seconds.
•
System Information Entry Keys: To enter passwords and
gain access the PEGAsys menu functions, the relevant keys
are:
NOTE: RDCM 02 is the default. This message can be customized in PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) Program Manual
•
Numeric 0-9: Enters password and system function information.
•
Enter: Enter information into the system menu.
After the 30 second control period, any other module can provide system inputs (unless a module programmed as system
master assumes control).
•
Delete: Exit system menu and correct wrong entries.
RDCM 02
IN CONTROL
To enter the password, press the “0” key. The RDCM opens the
password entry menu and displays:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
L-3.1.3 RESET
Each key entry will then display the “#” character:
After all active alarms and troubles have been cleared, input
devices programmed to the latching sequence will show:
PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD
####
XXX
ALARMS ACTIVE
If the password entry is incorrect, the display will become:
PASSWORD ENTRY FAILED
Input devices programmed to the non-latching sequence will
show:
76-100016-001
The RDCM will request another password entry request, and, if
correct, the PEGAsys will send the 30 second global lockout
L-3
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
command to all other RDCMs.
L-4
The calling device (address 02) will then have access to the
PEGAsys menu. Please refer to this manual for menu operating instructions.
SPECIFICATIONS
ELECT RICAL
If during the password entry sequence any key other than the
numeric key (except “Delete”) is pressed before the “Enter” key,
the PEGAsys will update the RDCM with the default display.
Input voltage
24 VDC nominal
Supervisory current
64 mA nominal
L-3.2
Alarm current
85 mA nominal
RS-485 network
Up to 4000 ft from
FenwalNET control panel
using #18 AWG
twisted/shelded wire
Maximum RDCM/RDMs
15 RDCMs/16 RDMs in any
combination, not exceeding
maximum for each module
Wiring style
NFPA Style 4, Class "B"
LED Status Display
The front panel display LEDs will operate in three modes:
•
Off: No system activity.
•
On Continuously: Acknowledge alarm or trouble.
•
Pulsing: 1 second on, 1 second off; active alarm or trouble.
L-3.3
LCD Display
With no active events in the system, all RDCM/RDMs will display the default message:
SYSTEM STATUS NORMAL 10:00am 03-08-99
PEGASYS
“PEGASYS” is the default message. This can be customized
by PCS. Please refer to the PEGAsys Configuration Software
(PCS) Program manual.
MECHANICAL
Dimensions
12.05" W X 7.156" H
L-3.4
Weight
4 lbs, 13 oz
Password Data Structure
Two system levels are available from the RDCM. These are:
Level 1, User Level and Level 2, Installer Level. Please refer to
the “Menu Function” and “Menu Structure” sections of the PEGAsys Fire Alarm/Suppression Control System manual for descriptions of the capabilities available through these levels.
ENVIRONMENTAL
Each PEGAsys is shipped from the factory with default passwords for Level 1 of 987 and Level 2 of 1865. Default passwords can be customized in the level 2 “Set Menu Function”.
Changing passwords for the system can be accomplished from
any RDCM or directly from the PEGAsys.
Operating temperature
32oF (0oC) - 120oF (49oC)
Operating humidity
85% non-condensing
L-5
INSTALLATION
See Figure L-4.
L-3.5
RDCM/RDM Local Trouble Conditions
The RDCM/RDM is supervised for failure of the power supply
and failure to communicate with the PEGAsys during the polling routine. The power failure display is:
REMOTE PSU FAULT “ON”
RDCM XX
If no communication is detected with the PEGAsys during the
polling routine and the PSU is active, a local trouble message
will be displayed on the RDCM/RDM.
NO COMMUNICATION WITH MAIN PANEL
August 1999
L-4
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
.409
MOUNTING FOR #10
(.190 DIA.) SCREWS
12.000
5.875
9.500
SW1 ADDRESS 1 TO 16 (F)
W1 LED BACKLIGHT ENABLE
1.250
VR1 LED BACKLIGHT ADJUST
VR2 LCD CONTRAST ADJUST
1/2" & 3/4"
COMBINATION KNOCKOUTS
(2) LOCATED ON TOP SURFACE
(1) LOCATED ON EACH SIDE.
DS1
ED
IELD
D SH
ISTE
TW
R
WE
PO
LE
CAB
TO
RTH
EA
SIS/
AS
CH
SW3
.
ND
OU
GR
HARDWARE FOR
GND. CONNECTION
CONNECTOR
LY
PP
SU
FM VED
RO
APP
UL
R
INSTRUCTION LABEL
.
NO
R.
SE
Figure L-4. Installation of RDM or RDCM
76-100016-001
L-5
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
L-6
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX M
ADDRESSABLE ALARMLINE™ MODULE
M-1
INTRODUCTION
M-3
The Addressable AlarmLineTM Module (AAM) permits an AlarmLine sensor cable to be directly interfaced to the PEGAsys control
panel. This interface will allow for pre-alarm, alarm, and trouble
conditions to be transmitted to the control panel via the RX/TX
(Receive/Transmit) loop. The AAM monitors the resistance of the
sensor cable and generates a pre-alarm (if enabled), alarm, or
overheat output (if enabled) when the resistance drops below the
programmed threshold. The module also supervises the AlarmLine cable for opens and shorts, which will generate a fault condition. All of the pre-alarm, alarm, overheat, and trouble conditions
will be displayed on the Central Control Module (CCM) of the
PEGAsys panel. Up to 255 AAM modules can be connected to a
single RX/TX module. Use of multiple AAMs allows flexibility in
zoning larger installations for location of alarm and zone output
control; the control panel acts as a central display and control interface.
OPERATION
A change in temperature produces a change in resistance between the loops within the sensor cable (as the temperature
increases, resistance decreases exponentially). This change is
continuously monitored by the AAM, which generates an alarm
or pre-alarm signal at a predetermined level corresponding to
the temperature set point.
The temperature at which the system will alarm is determined
by selecting one of 16 configuration settings using the control
panel’s configuration software or CCM menu options. The appropriate configuration setting for a given set point is established by the use of a nomogram incorporating two know factors:
•
Maximum ambient temperature of the alarm zone
•
Length of the sensor cable
The integrating (averaging) effect of the sensor cable allows it
to detect localized hot spot or a low level temperature increase
over the entire length. For more detailed information, please
refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
For complete information, please refer to the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual (73.04).
TM
M-4
MAINTENANCE OR REPLACEMENT
The AAM is shipped from the factory as an assembled component and is not field serviceable. Little or no maintenance is
required.
Refer to Chapters 4 and 5 of this manual and to the AlarmLine
Addressable Linear Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual for further information on maintenance and testing of field devices connected to the FN-2000 panel's RX/TX loop.
Figure M-1. Addressable AlarmLine™ Module Front Panel
M-5
PARTS LIST
Refer to Section 9 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-2
ADDRESSING AND REGISTERING
Each AAM is shipped from the factory with the default address
of ‘000’. This permits connection to the Power Communication
(PC) line without interfering with devices already on the loop.
Only one device with this default address should be connected
to the PC line at a time. Alternately, the AAM address can be
preset with a hand-held programmer (P/N 74-200013-001) after which the module can be connected to the PC line. If a handheld programmer is not available, the address can be changed
directly at the CCM using the procedure outlined in Chapter 2
of this manual.
76-100016-001
M-6
INSTALLATION
Refer to Paragraph 3-2 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear
Heat Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-7
TESTING
Refer to Section 7 of the AlarmLine Addressable Linear Heat
Detector Installation, Operation and Maintenance Manual.
M-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
M-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX N
NETWORKABLE CENTRAL CONTROL MODULE (NCCM)
N-1
play the current time and date on the system LCD and provides
basic information for real-time operations.
INTRODUCTION
The Networkable Central Control Module (NCCM), shown in
Figure N-1, is the heart of the PEGAsys system and is composed of two printed circuit board assemblies; the display control module (DCM), and the CCM printed circuit board. The
NCCM is available in two versions, P/N 76-100008-501 for
single-loop systems and P/N 76-100008-600 for multi-loop systems.
Internal diagnostics enhance the troubleshooting ability of the
system. Examples include: microprocessor failure, memory failure, RS-232 port troubles, etc. Network diagnostics are separately controlled and report to appropriate panels.
System Status Display
Two individually programmable relay outputs (MP3 & MP4) are
provided on the NCCM for controlling building functions during
alarm occurrences. Relays are Form C, 1 Amp @ 30 VDC rated.
AC POWER
SYSTEM TROUBLE
ALARM
SUPERVISORY
PRE-ALARM
SYSTEM
ACKNOWLEDGE
SILENCE
SYSTEM
RESET
SCROLL
SILENCE
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Two individually programmable signal output circuits (MP1 &
MP2) provided are used primarily for signaling devices (horns,
bells, strobes) and deliver up to 2.0 amps of 24 VDC power.
The MP1 output can be optionally programmed for releasing
applications using solenoid-actuated suppression equipment
(agent and sprinkler).
All four NCCM outputs can be programmed via EOC to activate
from either panel or, if provided, network inputs.
One non-programmable trouble relay is supplied which is normally powered (24 VDC) and will transfer on any system (or, if
provided, network) trouble, supervisory, pre-alarm and complete
power-off condition. Relay is form C style, rated 1 Amp @ 30
VDC.
Figure N-1. Networkable Central Control Module Front Panel
The NCCM is essentially identical to the CCM described earlier
in this manual, and has the same capabilities. However, the
CCM printed circuit board has been designed to receive the
optional Network Interface Card (See the physical description
and menu options in Appendix J of this manual), enabling networked operation.
Refer to Appendix I, page I-2, for mechanical installation details.
An event history buffer is provided on the NCCM which will store
1024 entries for single-loop and 6100 entries for multi-loop system events information. Network option does not alter event
limits however, network events are recorded. The system menu
permits operator retrieval of recorded events. The PCS program
provides the ability to download, store and print all or a portion
of the event history buffer.
Additionally, the display control module adjunct to the main processor module provides connection to the Remote Display Control Module (RDCM) and Remote Display Module (RDM)
described in Appendix L of this manual.
N-2
The NCCM’s common display module assembly (which is physically and electronically attached to the main processor module)
provides the system with the operator interface and, if provided,
network interface for control switches, system status LEDs, system trouble/alarm buzzer, an 80 character (2x40) LCD display
and an integral numeric keypad. The keypad is used for entering the security password and navigating through the user
menus. The system buzzer provides two distinct signaling patterns for audible warning of system alarms and troubles.
CONFIGURATION/FUNCTION
The CCM PCB controls the operation and supervision of all the
system modules and software within the PEGAsys system. It
receives loop device data from the RX/TX module, and system
data from the optional NIC and/or RDCM. It processes the data
based on pre-programmed instructions and transmits output
commands to the output modules, optional NIC and/or RDCM
or RDM modules, loop output devices, and the adjunct display
control module.
The CCM PCB contains the system’s CPU, real-time clock,
watchdog timer and two serial RS-232 ports: A programming
input/output and a remote printer output port. These ports accept 6-wire RJ-12 modular connectors. PEGAsys Configuration Software (PCS) is used to program the system. A multilevel
password scheme protects the system from unauthorized access.
The real-time clock provides the NCCM with the ability to dis-
76-100016-001
N-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
N-2
76-100016-001
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
APPENDIX O
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
O-1
CENTRAL STATION OPERATION
For central station operation, the PEGAsys control panel must
be configured for central station use through PCS menu (Network Settings). A Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 must be wired
to the PEGAsys control panel as shown in Figure O-1. See Model
5104 Installation Manual for information regarding connection
of the DACT to the telephone line for alarm and trouble
transmission(s).
Silent Knight DACT Model 5104 PCB
NO NC C
Volt Free
Relay 2
PegaSYS CCM PCB
NO NC C
Fault Relay
4.7k
18
8
9
4.7k
Zone 3 Alarm
16
10
11
12
17
15
Zone 4 Trouble
14
13
Figure O-1. Wiring for DACT
76-100016-001
O-1
August 1999
PEGAsys
Intelligent Suppression Control/Fire Alarm System
(THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK)
August 1999
O-2
76-100016-001
TECHNICAL MANUAL USER FEEDBACK FORM
(Use this report to indicate deficiencies, user remarks and recommendations relating to the publication. Fold on dotted line, tape and mail to
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc., 400 Main Street, Ashland, MA 01721, Attn. Documentation Manager or FAX to 508-881-8920)
DATE:
1. PART NUMBER
2. VOLUME NO.
3. TITLE (NOMENCLATURE)
4. CHANGE NO. OR REV. DATE
5. SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
6. PRIORITY OF COMMENT
7. USER EVALUATION
MANUAL IS:
8.
G PROBLEM
G EXCELLENT
G GOOD
G QUESTION
G FAIR
G POOR
G COMPLETE
G INCOMPLETE
G SUGGESTION G COMMENT: (check one)
9. RECOMMENDED CHANGE TO PUBLICATION
PAGE PARAGRAPH LINE FIGURE TABLE
NO.
NO.
NO.
NO.
NO.
10. ORIGINATOR
RECOMMENDED CHANGES AND REASON
(Use Blank Continuation Sheets as Required)
11. COMPANY NAME
12. ADDRESS
13. KIDDE-FENWAL USE ONLY
a. Received b. Action Necessity
220423
c. Priority
d. Comments
FOLD
Place
Stamp
Here
KIDDE-FENWAL, Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
Attn. Documentation Manager
FOLD
220423
LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT
Kidde-Fenwal, Inc. represents that this product is free from defects in material and workmanship, and will repair or replace any
product or part thereof which proves to be defective in workmanship or material for a period of twelve (12) months from the date
of purchase but not to exceed eighteen (18) months after shipment by the manufacturer. For a full description of KiddeFenwal’s LIMITED WARRANTY which, among other things, limits the duration of warranties of MERCHANTABILITY and FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE and EXCLUDES liability for CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, please read the entire
LIMITED WARRANTY on the Kidde-Fenwal Quotation, Acceptance of Order, and/or Original Invoice which will become part of
your sales agreement. Please contact Kidde-Fenwal directly for a return material authorization (RMA) number before returning
material to the factory at Ashland, Massachusetts, shipment prepaid. Kidde-Fenwal will repair or replace and ship prepaid.
Fire Systems
Kidde-Fenwal Inc.
400 Main Street
Ashland, MA 01721
(508) 881-2000
Fax: (508) 881-8920
These instructions do not purport to cover all the details or variations in the equipment
described, nor do they provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with
installation, operation and maintenance. All specifications subject to change without
notice. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are
not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to
Kidde-Fenwal Inc., Ashland, MA.
76-100016-001
Rev. BB
©
1998 Kidde-Fenwal Inc.
Printed in USA